Sie sind auf Seite 1von 540

s

Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619

Copyright (C) Siemens AG 2004

Issued by the Communications Group


Hofmannstraße 51
D-81359 München

Technical modifications possible.


Technical specifications and features are binding only insofar as
they are specifically and expressly agreed upon in a written contract.
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

This document consists of a total of 540 pages. All pages are issue 1.

0 Abbreviations ...................................................................................... 1
1 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070 13
1.1 Using this Help System .................................................................... 13
1.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features .......................................................... 14
1.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software................................................ 15
2 General 17
2.1 Date / Time Configuration................................................................. 17
2.2 Network Element Configuration........................................................ 18
2.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack .................................................. 20
2.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack.................................................... 24
2.5 Option Settings ................................................................................. 28
2.6 EOW Configurations......................................................................... 30
2.7 Neighbour Ports................................................................................ 31
2.8 Script Configuration .......................................................................... 32
3 Extension Shelf 37
3.1 Extension Shelf Configuration .......................................................... 37
3.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration ....................................................... 38
4 Subrack Equipping 39
4.1 Possible Equipping Information ........................................................ 39
4.2 Actual Equipping Information............................................................ 40
4.3 Card Inventory Summary.................................................................. 41
5 Card Label Information 43
5.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information......................... 43
5.2 PDH Cards Label Information........................................................... 44
5.3 IFO155ME Card Label Information .................................................. 45
5.4 SCOH Card Label Information.......................................................... 46
5.5 IF2M Card Label Information............................................................ 47
5.6 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information................................................. 48
5.7 Booster Cards Label Information...................................................... 49
6 Card Configuration 51
6.1 Card Equipment Configuration ......................................................... 51
6.2 SCOH Card Configuration ................................................................ 52
6.3 CLU Card Configuration ................................................................... 53
6.4 SF160G Card Configuration ............................................................. 54
6.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration .............................................. 55
6.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack ..................... 57
6.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration................................................... 58
6.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards................................................... 60
6.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration ....................................................... 61
6.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards ................................................... 62
6.11 IFSO* Cards Configuration............................................................... 64
6.12 Port Provisioning Configuration ........................................................ 65
7 Timing 67
7.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration.................................. 67
7.2 T0 Configuration ............................................................................... 70
7.3 T1 Configuration ............................................................................... 71
7.4 T3 / T4 Configuration........................................................................ 72
8 Alarms 75
8.1 Alarm List.......................................................................................... 75

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 i
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.2 NEAP Configuration ......................................................................... 78


8.3 Equipment Alarms ............................................................................ 79
8.4 Communication Alarms .................................................................... 81
8.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table............................................... 83
8.6 E3/VC3 Alarms ................................................................................. 88
8.7 1:N MSP Alarms ............................................................................... 90
8.8 TIF Configuration.............................................................................. 92
8.9 TCA List ............................................................................................ 93
9 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows 95
9.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 95
9.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................... 96
9.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow ........................................................................... 97
9.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection ............................................................. 98
9.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow ......................................................................... 99
9.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection ........................................................... 100
9.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow ....................................................................... 101
9.8 ETH Traffic Flow............................................................................. 102
9.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow .................................................................... 103
9.10 VC4 Configuration .......................................................................... 104
9.11 VC4 Selection ................................................................................. 107
10 Protection Traffic Flow 109
10.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow ..................................................... 109
10.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow................................................. 110
10.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ................................................ 111
10.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow ................................................ 112
10.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................... 113
10.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow ......................................................... 114
10.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 115
10.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 116
10.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .......................................................... 117
10.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow ...................................................... 118
10.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .................................................... 119
10.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow .................................................... 120
10.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 121
10.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow ..................................... 122
10.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow.................. 123
10.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow............................... 124
10.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow ..................................... 125
10.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow.................. 126
10.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow............................................................. 127
11 Protection Selection Windows 129
11.1 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards...................................... 129
12 Traffic Configuration 131
12.1 Port Configuration........................................................................... 131
12.2 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards .............................................. 133
12.3 STM-N Configuration...................................................................... 136
12.4 AU4/VC4 Configuration .................................................................. 140
12.5 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP ........................................................ 142
12.6 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP ........................................................ 144
12.7 ETH Configuration .......................................................................... 147
12.8 E12 Configuration........................................................................... 150
12.9 E3 Configuration............................................................................. 152
13 Multiplex Structure 153
13.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure.................................................................. 153

ii A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14 Cross Connections 155


14.1 Cross Connections List................................................................... 155
14.2 Plain Cross Connections List.......................................................... 157
14.3 Add Cross Connection.................................................................... 159
14.4 Cross Connection Details ............................................................... 161
14.5 Cross Connections Graphic............................................................ 162
14.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details ................................................. 164
14.7 Modify Cross Connection ............................................................... 165
14.8 Overhead Cross Connections ........................................................ 166
15 Protection Management 169
15.1 Protection Management ................................................................. 169
16 1 plus 1 MSP Protection 171
16.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration...................................................... 171
17 1 to 1 MSP Protection 173
17.1 1:1 MSP Configuration ................................................................... 173
18 1 to N MSP Protection 175
18.1 1:N MSP Configuration................................................................... 175
18.2 Add 1:N MSP .................................................................................. 177
18.3 1:N MSP Extension ........................................................................ 178
18.4 Add Working Ports.......................................................................... 179
18.5 Working STM-1 Selection............................................................... 180
18.6 Working VC4 Selection................................................................... 181
19 2F/4F-SPRING Protection 183
19.1 2F SPRING Configuration .............................................................. 183
19.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration..................................................... 186
19.3 4F SPRING Configuration .............................................................. 189
19.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration ....................................... 192
19.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration......................................... 194
19.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING...................... 195
19.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING...................................... 196
19.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra ............................ 197
19.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING...................................... 198
19.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING ................. 199
19.11 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING ................................. 200
19.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra........................ 201
19.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING ................................. 202
20 Link Protection 203
20.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow ........................................... 203
20.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration ........................................ 204
20.3 Add Extension Link Protection........................................................ 205
20.4 ISTM 4 Configuration...................................................................... 207
21 Concatenations 209
21.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection .................................................... 209
21.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection................................................................. 210
21.3 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection................................................................. 211
21.4 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection................................................................. 212
21.5 Virtual 16x VC4 Selection............................................................... 213
21.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection....................................................... 214
21.7 Concatenated VC4 Configuration................................................... 215
21.8 VC12-2v Configuration ................................................................... 219
21.9 VC3-2v Configuration ..................................................................... 220

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 iii
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.10 Concatenation Configuration...................................................... 221


21.11 Concatenation Details ................................................................ 224
21.12 Add Concatenation Group.......................................................... 225
21.13 Concatenation Group Templates ............................................... 226
21.14 Modify Template......................................................................... 227
22 VLAN 229
22.1 VLAN Functionality ......................................................................... 229
22.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow ....................................................................... 232
22.3 VLAN Selection .............................................................................. 234
22.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment .................................................... 235
22.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment........................................................ 238
22.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information ..................................................... 241
22.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment .............................................................. 242
23 Virtual VCs 243
23.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection......................................................... 243
23.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration ............................................................. 244
23.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration ............................................................... 247
23.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration ....................................................... 250
24 GFP Configurations 253
24.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow.................................................................. 253
24.2 GFP Group Subview....................................................................... 254
24.3 GFP Assignment ............................................................................ 255
24.4 PF2G5 GFP Assignment ................................................................ 257
24.5 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration............................ 259
24.6 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration ............................ 260
24.7 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration ............................ 261
24.8 PF2G5 Add CUG............................................................................ 262
24.9 SDH GFP Assignment.................................................................... 264
25 LCAS 267
25.1 LCAS State Configuration .............................................................. 267
25.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group ............................................... 269
25.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration........................................................... 270
25.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration......................................................... 271
25.5 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection .............................................. 272
25.6 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection .......................................... 273
25.7 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration..................................................... 274
25.8 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration .................................................. 277
26 MCF General 281
26.1 Message Communication Functions .............................................. 281
26.2 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration............................................ 282
26.3 MCF Transport Connection Information ......................................... 284
26.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance ...................................... 286
27 MCF CLNS 287
27.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information...................................... 287
27.2 MCF CLNS Performance................................................................ 289
28 MCF DCC 293
28.1 MCF DCC Configuration................................................................. 293
28.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration ................................................... 295
28.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance.................................................... 297
28.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address ................................................ 299
28.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address............................................ 301
28.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections.................. 302

iv A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

29 MCF Ethernet 303


29.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration ............................................. 303
29.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance.............................................. 305
29.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address .......................................... 307
29.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address ...................................... 309
30 MCF OSI/IP 311
30.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration...................................................... 311
30.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration...................................................... 312
30.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance....................................................... 314
30.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address ........................... 316
30.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address ....................... 318
31 IP Settings 319
31.1 IP Addresses Configuration............................................................ 319
31.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify ............................................................. 321
31.3 IP Static Routing Configuration ...................................................... 322
31.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add ............................................................ 324
31.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify........................................................ 325
32 OSPF Settings 327
32.1 OSPF Configuration ....................................................................... 327
32.2 OSPF Areas Configuration ............................................................. 329
32.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify .............................................................. 331
32.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration .................................................... 332
32.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration ........................................... 333
32.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add ................................................. 335
32.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration....................................................... 336
32.8 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add ............................................................ 338
32.9 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration ............................................. 340
32.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration ....................................... 341
32.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add............................................. 343
32.12 OSPF Neighbours Information ................................................... 344
32.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information........................................ 346
32.14 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details ..................................... 348
32.15 OSPF LSDB Information ............................................................ 349
32.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details.......................................................... 351
32.17 OSPF External LSDB Information.............................................. 352
32.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details ........................................... 354
33 TCP Settings 355
33.1 TCP Connections Information ........................................................ 355
33.2 TCP Connections Entry Details ...................................................... 357
34 Data 359
34.1 Subrack Data .................................................................................. 359
34.2 ASIC Data Information.................................................................... 360
34.3 Copy Data....................................................................................... 361
34.4 Copy Card Data .............................................................................. 363
34.5 DB Management Configuration ...................................................... 364
34.6 DB Download Dialog ...................................................................... 366
34.7 DB Upload Dialog ........................................................................... 367
34.8 NE Logs Information....................................................................... 368
34.9 Log Records Attribute..................................................................... 369
34.10 Copy to Permanent MACs ......................................................... 370
35 Performance 371
35.1 Ethernet Packet Performance ........................................................ 371

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 v
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.2 AU4 PJE Performance ................................................................... 374


35.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance ......................................................... 376
35.4 MSTTP Near End Performance...................................................... 379
35.5 MSTTP Far End Performance ........................................................ 383
35.6 RSTTP Near End Performance ...................................................... 387
35.7 VCCTP Near End Performance...................................................... 391
35.8 VCCTP Far End Performance ........................................................ 395
35.9 VCTTP Near End Performance ...................................................... 399
35.10 VCTTP Far End Performance .................................................... 403
35.11 VC12 Near End Performance .................................................... 407
35.12 VC12 Far End Performance....................................................... 411
35.13 GFP Frames Performance ......................................................... 415
36 RPR 417
36.1 RPR Switch Configuration .............................................................. 417
36.2 RPR Ring Performance .................................................................. 420
36.3 RPR Feeder Performance .............................................................. 423
36.4 Adding a Permanent Entry ............................................................. 426
37 Security 427
37.1 Access Information ......................................................................... 427
37.2 NMS NE Password......................................................................... 428
37.3 Change Password to Default.......................................................... 429
38 Software 431
38.1 Software Management ................................................................... 431
38.2 Software Download ........................................................................ 433
38.3 Delta Software Download ............................................................... 434
38.4 Active APS Record ......................................................................... 435
38.5 APS Compatibility Information........................................................ 436
39 Fault Clearance 437
39.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance ................................ 437
39.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance .......................................... 439
39.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance....................................... 443
39.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance............................................... 448
39.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance........................................... 451
39.6 TIF Fault Clearance........................................................................ 454
39.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance................................................................ 455
40 How to... (General Tasks) 457
40.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings ................................................... 457
40.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping ...................................... 458
40.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards...................................... 459
40.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports .......................................... 460
40.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations
from Object to Object...................................................................... 461
40.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object............... 462
40.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging ............................... 463
41 How to... (Timing) 465
41.1 How to Configure the Timing .......................................................... 465
41.2 How to Set Sync Priorities .............................................................. 467
42 How to... (Alarms) 469
42.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling................................ 469
42.2 How to Suppress Alarms ................................................................ 470
42.3 How to Configure TIF Ports ............................................................ 471

vi A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43 How to... (Cross Connections) 473


43.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options .................... 473
43.2 How to Create a Cross Connection................................................ 474
43.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection .................. 475
43.4 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection .................... 476
43.5 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection .................... 477
43.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection........... 478
43.7 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet)
Port to an RPR................................................................................ 479
43.8 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection ............................ 480
43.9 How to Add and Remove Path Protections .................................... 481
43.10 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection............................ 482
43.11 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection .......................... 483
43.12 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection ........... 484
43.13 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection.................. 485
43.14 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection .................................... 486
43.15 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections ............................... 487
44 How to... (OH Cross Connections) 489
44.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options ............. 489
44.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection ....................................... 490
44.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection ................................ 491
45 How to... (Protections) 493
45.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection ....................... 493
45.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection.......................... 494
45.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection.......................... 495
45.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings ............... 496
45.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection........................... 497
45.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection....................... 498
45.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card
Protection........................................................................................ 499
45.8 How to Configure RPR Protection.................................................. 500
45.9 How to Create an SNCP Protection ............................................... 501
45.10 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path .......... 502
45.11 How to Set Up the Squelching Table ......................................... 504
45.12 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link ............................... 506
46 How to... (Concatenations) 507
46.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations ......................................... 507
46.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations ......................................... 508
47 How to... (GFP Configurations) 509
47.1 How to Create / Delete VC Channels............................................. 509
47.2 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups ................................... 510
47.3 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel......................... 511
47.4 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG ......................................... 512
47.5 How to Specify the CUG Service Class ......................................... 514
47.6 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic ........ 515
47.7 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths ............................................... 516
48 How to... (Data and Software Handling) 517
48.1 How to Download VCDB Files........................................................ 517
48.2 How to Upload VCDB Files ............................................................ 518
49 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules) 519
49.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH................................... 519
49.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH ................................................ 520

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 vii
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

49.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC..... 523


49.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH ................ 526
49.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB ............................................................. 529
49.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend ............................................................ 530

viii A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

0 Abbreviations

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AFI Authority and Format Identifier

AIS Alarm Indication Signal

AK TPDU Acknowledge Transport Protocol Data Unit

ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown

APD Avalanche Photo Diode

APS Automatic Protection Switching / Application Program Switching

AS Alarm Suppression

ASBR Autonomous System Border Router

ASCII American Standard for Information Interchange

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notification One (ITU X.208)

ASW Application SoftWare

AU Administrative Unit

AU4 Administrative Unit for VC-4

AUI Attachment Unit Interface

AUX Auxiliary channel

BASW BAsic SoftWare

BBE Background Block Error

BDM Background Debug Mode interface

BER Bit Error Ratio

CC Cross Connect / Cross Connection

CD Collision Detection

CE Communauté Européenne

CF Card Failure

CFG Configuration

CH Channel

CL Configuration Log

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 1
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

CLNS ConnectionLess Network layer Service

CLR Clear

CLU Central Clock Unit

CP Connection Protection

CPL Current Problem List

CPU Central Processing Unit

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check

CRS Card Release State

CS4 Connection Switch 4xSTM-1

CSO Card Switch Off

CT Card Type

CTP Connection Termination Point

CUG Closed User Group

DB Data Base

DC Direct Current

DCC Data Communication Channel

DCCB Data Communication Channel Bus

DCCM DCC bytes D4 to D12 (Multiplex section)

DCCR DCC bytes D1 to D3 (Regenerator section)

DCM Dispersion Compensation Module

DCN Data Communication Network

DEC Decimal

DEMUX Demultiplexer

DL Data Link

DNU Do Not Use

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

DSP Domain Specific Part

E4 Electrical interface signal

EBC Error Block Count

2 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

ECC Embedded Communication Channel

ECCM ECC for Multiplex section

ECCR ECC for Regeneration section

EDI Equipment Defect Indication / Electronic Data Interchange

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EM Element Manager

EOW Engineering Order Wire

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EPS Equipment Protection Switch

ES Electrical Section / Errored Second(s)

ESD ElectroStatic Discharge

ESM-Core Provides optical 622 Mbit/s link to main shelf

ETS European Telecommunication Standard

ETH Ethernet

ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute

EXC Excessive bit error rate

F Standardized interface for connection of the operating terminal

FAA Fan Alarm Adapter

FAS Frame Alignment Signal

FC/PC Connector type

FE Far End

FEBE Far End Block Error

FEC Forward Error Correction

FEPROM Flash Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

FERF Far End Receive Failure

FG Functional Group

FIFO First In First Out

FM Fault Management

FO Fiber Optic

FOD Fiber Optic Distributor

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 3
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

FOP Failure of (MSP) Protocol

FOT Fail of Topology

FTA File Transfer Area

FTP File Transfer Protocol

FU Functional Unit

FW Firmware

GDMO Guidelines for the Definition of Managed Objects (ITU X.722)

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GMT Greenwich Mean Time

GTP Group Termination Point

GUI Graphical User Interface

HW HardWare

HEL Historical Event Log

HEX Hexadecimal

HO Higher Order

ICB Internal Control Bus

ICS Internal Communication System

ICU Internal Control Unit

ID Identification

IDI Initial Domain Identifier

IDP Initial Domain Part

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IF Interface

IF2M Electrical E1 interface card, 63 x 2 Mbit/s

IF345M PDH Interface 34/45 Mbit/s

IFO155M Optical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFO155M-E Electrical STM-1 card, Octuple 155 Mbit/s

IFOFE Optical Octuple Fast Ethernet card

4 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

IFOFE-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-4 or VC-3

IFOFES-E Electrical Octuple Fast Ethernet card, VC-3 or VC12

IFQ2G5, IFQ2G5B Optical STM-16 card, Quad 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP

IFQ622M Optical STM-4 card, Quad 622 Mbit/s, SFP

IFQGBE Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card

IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card

IFQGBEB Optical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator


functionality

IFQGBEB-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet card; provides VLAN concentrator


functionality

IFQGBE-E Electrical Quad Gigabit Ethernet Card

IFS10G, IFS10GB Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s

IFS10G-M Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Metro WDM

IFS10G-R Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for Regio WDM

IFS10G-WLS Optical STM-64 Card, Single 10 Gbit/s, for WLS WDM purposes

IFS2G5 Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s

IFS2G5B Optical STM-16 Card, Single 2.5 Gbit/s, SFP

IFS40G-MX Optical Multiplexer/Demultiplexer Card, 4 x 10 Gbit/s to 40 Gbit/s

IFSOA Interface Single Optical Amplifier

IFSOA-PDC Interface Single Optical Amplifier-PDC

IFSOB Interface Single Optical Booster

IFSOB-PDC Interface Single Optical Booster-PDC

IMN Installation Manual

IMTS Internal Multiplex Timing Source

INT Internal Supervision

I/O Input/Output

IP Internet Protocol

IS Intermediate System

ISDH Internal SDH Signal

ISF ISDH Signal Fail

ISO International Standards Organization

ISTM Internal Synchronous Transport Module

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 5
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

ISU ISDH Switch Layer Unit

ITMN Installation and Test Manual

ITU International Telecommunication Union

K1, K2 Automatic Protection Switching

KBUS K-byte BUS for MSP Control

LAN Local Area Network

LAPD Link Access Procedure on D Channel

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LED Light Emitting Diode

LNQ622M PDH Extension Link Card

LO Lower Order

LO SF Lower Order Switching Fabric

LOF Loss of Frame

LOL Loss of Lock

LOM Loss of Marker

LOP Loss of Pointer

LOS Loss of Signal

LSDB Link State Data Base

LSU Line Switching Unit

LT Line Termination

LT0 Loss of T0 clock

LTI Loss of Timing Source Incoming (T1, T3)

LTS Loss of Timing Source

MAC Media Access Control

MACAT Media Access Control Address Table

MCF Message Communication Functions

MDI Multiple Document Interface

6 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

MIB Management Information Base

MIBS Management Information Base of Synchronous Multiplexer

MIS-PT Mismatch Path Trace

MIS-RT Mismatch Regenerator Trace

MMC Multimedia Card

MMI Man Machine Interface

MS Multiplex Section

MSAIS Multiplex Section Alarm Indication

MSFERF Multiplex Section Far End Receive Failure

MSOH Multiplex Section Overhead

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MSPCO Multiplexer Section Path Connection

MSPTF Multiplexer Section Protection Function

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTS Multiplexer Timing Source

MTTR Mean Time to Repair

NC/P Network Connection Protection

NCT Network Craft Terminal

NE Network Element

NEC Network Element Controller

NEAP Network Element Alarm Panel

NMS Network Management System

NPDU Network Protocol Data Unit

NRZ Non Return to Zero

NRZI Non Return to Zero Invert

NSAP Network Service Access Point

OAS Optical Amplifier Section

OGL Operator Guidelines

OH Overhead

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 7
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

OHCC Overhead Cross Connections

OHF Overhead Functions

OH-IF Overhead Interface

OGL Operator Guidelines

OOF Out of Frame

OS Optical Section

OSNR Optical Signal/Noise Ratio

OSPF Open Shortest Path First (IP Protocol)

P4 Plesiochronous Digital Signal

P Protection

PCS Plesiochronous Connection Supervision

PCU Peripheral Control Unit

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDU Protocol Data Unit

PET Possible Equipping Table

PF2G5 Packet Switch Fabric Card

PJE Pointer Justification Event

PLL Phase Locked Loop

PLM Payload Mismatch

PLP Packet Level Protection

PM Performance Management or Performance Monitoring

POH Path Overhead

POM Path Overhead Monitoring

PP Path Protection

PRBS Pseudo Random Bit Sequence

PRC Primary Reference Clock

PROM Programmable Read-Only Memory

PSE Path Switching Event

PSU Power Supply Unit

PTI Path Trace Identifier

8 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Q Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

Q-B3 Q-Interface to Operations System via Ethernet-LAN

QECC Q-Interface via DCC

Q-F Standardized Interface for Connection of the Operating Terminal

QOS Quality of Service

QST-B3 QD2-Interface to LCT

Qx Interface to a Telecommunication Management Network

RAM Random Access Memory

RAP Reachable Address Prefix

RD Read

RDI Remote Defect Indication

REI Remote Error Indication

RFI Remote Failure Indication

RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer

RL Remote Loop

RLC Remote Loop Control

ROM Read-Only Memory

RPR Resilient Packet Ring

RS Regenerator Section

RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead

RTC Real Time Clock

RTI Regenerator Trace Identifier

Rx Receiver

SC Connector Type

SCOH Central Controller Card

SD Signal Degraded

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDI Service and Diagnostic Interface

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 9
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

SEC Synchronous Equipment Clock

SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function

SES Severely Errored Second(s)

SET2 Synchronous Equipment Timing

SETG Synchronous Equipment Timing Generator

SETS Functional Group "Synchronous Equipment Timing Source"

SF Signal Fail

SF160G Central VC-4 Switch Card

SF2G5 Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SF10G Low Order VC-3 / VC-12 Switch Card

SFP Small Form factor Pluggable (pluggable optical module)

SNCP/I Sub-Network Connection Protection / Inherent Monitoring

SNCP/N Sub-Network Connection Protection / Non-intrusive Monitoring

SNPA Sub-Network Point of Attachment

SOH Section Overhead

SPO Spontaneous Alarm

SQM Sequence Mismatch

SSF Server Signal Fail

SSM Synchronization Status Message

SSU Synchronzation Supply Unit

STM-N Synchronous Transport Module Level N

SUG Supervisory Unequipped Generation

SUM Supervisory Unequipped Monitoring

SW Software

T0 System Clock

T1 Timing Reference Signal from Line Signal

T3 Input for External Clock Reference Signal

T4 Output for Clock Reference Signal

TCA Threshold Crossing Alarm

TCP Termination Connection Point

10 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TxDeg Transmit Degraded

TED Technical Description

TxFail Transmission Fail

TIF Telemetry Interface

TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch

TMP Timestamp

TNMS Telecommunication Network Management System

TTI Trail Trace Identifier

TTP Trail Termination Point

TP Termination Point

TPDU Transport Protocol Data Unit

TSD Trail Signal Degrade

TSF Trail Signal Fail

TU Tributary Unit

TUG Tributary Unit Group

Tx Transmitter

TXDeg Transmit Degrade Signal

TXFAIL Transmit Failure

UAS Unavailable Second(s)

UAT Unavailable Time

UMN User Manual

UNEQ Unequipped

USI User Interface

UTIF Universal Transmission Internal Interface

VC Virtual Container

VC-n Virtual Container Level n

VCDB Variable Configuration Data Block

VCnTTP VCn Trail Termination Point

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 11
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WLS WDM Longspan System

WR Write

WTR Wait to Restore time

12 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

1 Welcome to SURPASS hiT 7070

1.1 Using this Help System


This help system provides information on the windows and menus of the SURPASS hiT 7070,
repair actions after alarm messages, and selected task instructions ("How to ...").

Displaying help topics

In the Help menu, click Help Topics...

The SURPASS hiT 7070 Help window is displayed, giving you access to the table of contents,
an index, and a full-text search function.

Displaying the help of the currently open window

Press the F1 key

or

Click the question mark button in the toolbar

or

in the Help menu, click On Window... F1.

Displaying information on the software

In the Help menu, click About...

Printing help windows

To start the printout click the print button in the toolbar.

In case of technical problems with the printout, print the identical help page out of the GUIMN
manual.

Notes

Standard MS Windows functions and buttons are not described in this online help.

If there is a path stated at the top of the help window specifying how to find the corresponding
SURPASS hiT 7070 window, that path should only be seen as an example. In many cases,
there are also other ways to open the same SURPASS hiT 7070 window.

[4352]

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 13
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

1.2 SURPASS hiT 7070 Features


The SURPASS hiT 7070 is a comprehensive multi-service SDH multiplexer and cross-
connect for universal use. The SURPASS hiT 7070 is configurable as

• TMX (terminal multiplexer),

• ADM (add/drop multiplexer), or

• small LXC (local cross-connect).

in multi-service access and edge network applications.

The network elements can be used in a straightforward way of creating point-to-point


connections, linear chain configurations and ring configurations.

According to requirements, equipping for the following application scenarios is possible:

• Terminal-to-terminal topologies,

• Linear topologies with add/drop functions (chains),

• Feeder network functionalities.

The SURPASS hiT 7070 offers not only standard functions, but also a lot of additional
sophisticated functions for fast and complex traffic transfer and enhanced protection features,
such as:

• Ethernet access with 10BaseT, 100BaseTX, and 1000T interfaces,

• Interfaces for SDH traffic signals up to STM-64,

• Virtual concatenation,

• Contiguous concatenation,

• Single fiber operation with optical splitter,

• 2-fiber ring protection,

• 4-fiber ring protection,

• RPR functionalities,

• Closed User Groups (CUG),

• EOW functions,

• Support of VLAN,

• Support of logical ports,

• IP / OSI tunneling,

• etc.

14 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

1.3 About SURPASS hiT 7070 Software


The complete Element Manager software (to be installed on the operating terminal) consists
of the following components:

• Ethernet software as a software package of the used Ethernet hardware.


(HW component with SW driver for the Ethernet card of the PC, Workstation, or
Mainframe used. This driver is not part of the SURPASS hiT 7070 software pack-
age.)

• The OSI Stack software consisting of LLC Driver and OSI Stack (Marben Stack)
software,

• NE Proxy software,

• TNMS CT software,

• Java Virtual Machine software,

• SURPASS hiT 7070 software package (LCT or NCT).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 15
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2 General

2.1 Date / Time Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> NE Time...

Opening this window causes a request apply of date and time of the NE. The received values
are displayed in the Current NE Time field and are automatically updated each second,
according to the internal clock source of the PC that is used as LCT/NCT.

Current NE Time

The current NE time can be changed by adjusting the PC-time in the system time setup of the
MS Windows control panel.

Adjust NE Time to PC-GMT

The date and time values for the PC-GMT are given by the MS Windows system time
settings. The date and time values are displayed in read only fields.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 17
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2.2 Network Element Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> Network Element...

The window is used to allocate user defined location name and application type.

Value Ranges:

Name 48 Bytes

Location 64 Bytes

Type

Displays the NE type.

18 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Startup Info

Displays information about the latest NE startup.

NE Unique HW Code

Comprising the NE serial number and family code.

Application Type

An application type name can be inserted.

Second Power Supply Monitoring

If this checkbox is set, the Second Power Supply Monitoring is activated.

PSE Switch For Whole NE

If this checkbox is set, the path protection switching event notification is sent in case of an
activated SNCP. Its configuration is valid for all protected cross connections of the NE.

Persistency Time

In this field, you can make the time settings for alarm self-recognition.

Raise Time [0..30 s]

This is the minimum time for which an alarm must be in the raised state in order to be
reported securely. The default raise time is 2 s.

Clear Time [1..30 s]

Specifies how long the alarm must be in the cleared state before it is reported as cleared. The
default clear time is 10 s.

Log Overwrite

Specifies if the Exception Log and/or the Trace Log will be overwritten in case of overflow.

Fault

Enable/Disable the following abnormal conditions (as communication alarms with severity
"Warning"):
enabled laser shutdown,
enabled port loopbacks,
deactivated ALS or forced (manual) laser shutdown on optical interface cards,
active operator commands for timing configurations (T0 configuration, T4 configuration),
active operator commands within protection schemes (1+1 MSP, 1:1 MSP, 1:N MSP,
2FSPRING, 4FSPRING, Microshelf extension traffic protection, 1:N card protection of
IF2M/IF345M/IFO155M-E, RPR bypass protection)

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 19
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2.3 Module View, Double-row Subrack

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.

20 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment

Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.

Top window segment

The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.

The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.

If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the double-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.

Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 21
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.

22 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment

The bottom window segment provides the port list.

It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

How to Configure the Equipping

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 23
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2.4 Module View, Single-row Subrack

This window is accessible via the toolbar button

This window represents the physical appearance of the managed NE. Between the NE and
Subrack fields the configurated Extension Shelf types (subrack type and subrack ID) are
visible. It shows the slots and their (required) equipping. The Module View displays the
current required equipping of the NE only. The current equipping is not regarded in this view.

The Module View window consists of the top window segment and the bottom window
segment

Each part of the window contains a vertical scrollbar, if not all contents are visible.

24 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Top window segment

The top window segment contains different symbols for displaying the physical slots and the
possibly equipped cards.

The NE symbol in the uppermost row is used to display and configure NE-wide settings. The
symbol contains an alarm mask indicator (A).

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the NE-wide settings.

If one or more microshelves are used, there are several subrack tabs to display and configure
subrack-related settings:
Subrack 1 is the single-core subrack,
Subrack 2 and the following are the microshelves.

Adding or removing microshelf tabs from the Module View is possible via the Extension Shelf
Config window.

The slot number symbols are used to configure the NE equipment.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 25
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Right-click the slot number and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

The card symbol below each slot number symbol displays the current required equipping of
the NE. The appearance of the card symbols depends on the equipment state.

26 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Right-click the symbol and use the context menu to configure the required equipping.

Bottom window segment

The bottom window segment provides the port list.

It shows the physical ports of a card, if the card symbol in the top window segment is selected
(clicked).

Right-click the symbols, and in the context menu, click Subview... to open the Traffic Flow
windows of these ports.

How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

How to Configure the Equipping

How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

How to Create / Delete an SF2G5 or SF160G Card Protection

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 27
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2.5 Option Settings

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

In this window, you can preset the alarm severity threshold, the window that is opened at
startup, the time zone frequency display, and several general options for your desktop.

Alarm Severity Threshold

Used to set the threshold for alarm display. Alarms with severities above and equal to the
threshold are included in the alarm summary displayed in the cards. Alarms with severities
below the configured threshold are excluded from the alarm summary displayed in the cards.

For example, if critical is selected, only critical alarms are indicated in the cards. If major is
selected, critical and major alarms are displayed.

By default, the threshold warning is set which means that all alarms are included in the alarm
summary.

28 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Save on Exit: Used to enable or disable the saving of the alarm severity threshold setting at
application termination.

Open at Startup

Used to set the windows that open automatically at the next system startup.

Time Display

Used to set the time zone. Displayed or saved times are dependent on settings according to
the system time zone of the operation system.

Frequency Display

Used to set the kind of display (frequency or wavelength) with optical interfaces.

General

Alarm Flash: Used to enable or disable flashing.

Maximum numbers of list entries can be selected.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 29
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2.6 EOW Configurations

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> Overhead Functions...

Two Wire Handset:

Allows to select the telephone number of the NE.

Four Wire EM Interface:

Allows to connect to a EOW conference.

30 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2.7 Neighbour Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> Neighbour Ports...

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 31
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2.8 Script Configuration

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> File -> Script Configuration...

This window allows to handle script configuration files, which can be used to configure the
NE.

The script language gives access to all NE configurations except for MCF, overhead cross
connections and SW management.

Top Section

The displayed symbols correspond to the File and Script menus:

32 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Symbol Corresponding Menu Description


Item

File -> New File Creates a new empty script


configuration file.

File -> Open... Opens an existing script configuration


file.

File -> Save As... Saves the script configuration file.

Script -> Execute Starts script configuration.

Script -> Stop Stops script configuration.

Script -> Record Automatically creates a script


configuration file.

For automatic creating, click the Record symbol, perform NE configurations, then click the
Stop symbol.

For manual creating, enter command lines according to the syntax described below.

Bottom Section

When the script configuration file is started, the bottom section shows parser errors.
To get the line of the error in the script configuration file, click the error message.

Syntax

• A semicolon follows every statement.

• A statement can occupy more than one line in the script.

• The configuration script does not support variables. All parameters must be given
explicitly either as numbers or as predefined symbols.

• The syntax is not case sensitive.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 33
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

• Script statements:
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Action (Parameters);
ObjectInstance (addressing of object instances) . Set (Attribute, Parameters);
// <Comment> or /* <comment> */

• An object instance is clearly identified by the following values:


ObjectClass
subrackNumber
slotReference
containerIndex
objectIndex

The ObjectClass is always given as a symbolic keyword followed by the remaining 4


values enclosed in brackets.

Example:
IFQ2G5(1, 306, 1, 1);
refers to the IFQ2G5 card in slot # 306.

• A SET invoke operation on an attribute can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The
keyword "Set" is used in the statements to configure values of attributes. The syntax for
performing a SET invoke is:
objectInstance.Set (Attribute, Value).

Example:
IFS2G5(1, 303).Set(EnableTransferHistoryFileAfterStartup,enabled);

• An action can only be invoked with an objectInstance. The keyword "Action" is used in
the statements to perform action invokes. The syntax for performing an ACTION invoke
is:
objectInstance.Action (Parameters);

Example:
EquipmentManager(1,211,1,1).ConfigureRequiredEquipping(((1, 306),
CardEquipped((IFS10G,"MspProtection"))));

• The "Wait" command allows the user to specify a certain amount of time that the script
configuration execution procedure must hold before executing the next command or
commands. The syntax for the Wait command is:
Wait(<time interval between 1 to 10000 seconds>);

Example: Wait(1000);

• The "Loop" command allows the user to specify blocks of instructions that must be
repeated a certain number of times. It adds to the scripting functionality the support of
execution cycles. The syntax for the Loop command is:
Loop(<number of times to repeat the block between 1 to 10000 or * to repeat until a user
stop>);
<Qst command 1>;
...
<Qst command n>;
EndLoop;

Examples:
Loop(50);
ne(1,254,1,1,1).Set(powerSupplyDuplication,enabled);
EndLoop;
Loop(*);
faultManager(1,254,1,1,1).Set(f4nIntegrationTime,(secondValues(3),11));
EndLoop;

34 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

• Syntax for the complex QST types:

SEQUENCE
(element 1, element 2, ... element n)

SEQUENCE OF BYTE
(byte 1, byte 2, ... byte n) or (<text>)

Example for ACTION:


ethernetLinkage(1,511).createReachableAddressEthernet(("SIEMENSAG"),
0x1, external, (0x11, 0x22,0x33,0x44,0x55,0x66), enabled);

SET OF
(element 1, element 2, ..., element n)

CHOICE
<choice tag>, <QST type associated with the given choice tag>

Example:
vcCo().connect(unprotectedUni, (SF2G5(1,309,2,1),SF2G5(1,309,2,3)));

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 35
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

3 Extension Shelf

3.1 Extension Shelf Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol

-> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...

This window allows to configure existing microshelves. The corresponding tab(s) will be
added to the Module View.

The main shelf name (see table below) appears as Subrack 1.

Subrack ID Subrack Type

1 Main Shelf

2 Microshelf #1

3 Microshelf #2

4 Microshelf #3

5 Microshelf #4

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 37
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

3.2 ESM-CORE Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View of a microshelf (subrack 2 or higher), by using
the context menu of an ESM-CORE card symbol -> Configuration...

Card State

Displays the card state.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Master System Microshelf

Displays if the microshelf is used as a master system.

38 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

4 Subrack Equipping

4.1 Possible Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Information -> Possible Equipping...

This window displays the possible equipping of the NE. It gives information about the possible
equipping of every slot with cards.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 39
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

4.2 Actual Equipping Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Information -> Actual Equipping...

This window displays the actual equipping of the NE. It gives information about the equipping
of the slots. This information is displayed hierarchically by means of a list control to ensure
that the desired information can be found efficiently.

40 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

4.3 Card Inventory Summary

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Information -> Card Inventory Summary...

This window displays - in addition to NE name and location - detailed information about all
configured cards:
ordering / serial numbers and the used frequencies.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 41
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5 Card Label Information

5.1 SDH or Ethernet Interfaces Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SDH or Ethernet interface card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 43
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5.2 PDH Cards Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, single-row subrack or microshelf, by using the
context menu of a PDH card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

44 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5.3 IFO155ME Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFO155ME symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 45
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5.4 SCOH Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

46 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5.5 IF2M Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack
or a microshelf, by using the context menu of an IF2M card symbol -> Information -> Card
Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 47
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5.6 IFS40G-MX Card Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFS40G-MX symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

48 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5.7 Booster Cards Label Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFSOB card symbol -> Information -> Card Label...

This window contains information about the card type (code number and hardware data).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 49
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6 Card Configuration

6.1 Card Equipment Configuration

This window is accessible via Module View, after right-clicking the slot number symbol and
selecting a card that offers different provisioning modes.

This window allows you to set the provisioning mode (Empty, Empty-Auto, Working or
protection if available).

If Empty-Auto is selected, it is not necessary to configure the traffic interface cards explicitly.
When a traffic interface card is plugged in, the SURPASS hiT 7070 (in active NE state) will
automatically detect its hardware type and add the card to the Required Equipping list.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 51
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.2 SCOH Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

EOW Active

Activates the Engineering Order Wire function.

Carries Overhead Connections

Displays the current connections.

52 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.3 CLU Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a CLU symbol -> Configuration...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Actual Clock Master

Displays the actual clock master.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 53
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.4 SF160G Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SF160G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Low order switching protection states

Displays the slot number of the working card and the selected switching fabric.

54 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.5 SF2G5 or SF10G Card Configuration

These windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context
menu of an SF2G5 or SF10G symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Current Selected Switching Fabric

Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Carries Traffic Connections

Displays the current connections.

Carries Overhead Connections

Displays the current connections.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 55
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Note:

The maximum number of SF2G5 cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.

The maximum number of SF10G cards in the subrack is limited to 4 working and 4 protecting
cards.

56 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.6 SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack

SF2G5 / SF10G - 2Mbit Connection - Slot 301

The LO switch fabric cards SF2G5 / SF10G must be inserted at slot 301 to allow cross
connections to the 2-Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211)

In case the LO switch fabric card SF2G5 / SF10G is inserted at another traffic slot, VC12
cross connections are possible but no 2-Mbit/s port of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208,
211) can be cross connected.

Workaround:

For connecting the 2 Mbit/s ports of the IF2M cards (slots 202, 205, 208, 211), insert and
configure the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G always at slot 301 of the SURPASS hiT 7070
SC subrack.

For cross connecting VC12 signals only, the LO switch card SF2G5 / SF10G can be inserted
and configured at any other traffic slot.

SF10G - VC4 Connection - Slot 301

Limitation:

In case the LO switch card SF10G is used at Slot 301 the VC4 containers #49, #50, #51 and
#52 are invisible.

Reason:

Those four VC4 containers are used for the fixed connection of 2-Mbit/s ports 1 - 252 (4 x 63
ports = 4x VC4) to the slot 301, so that the 2-Mbit/s cross connection can be done.

Workaround:

If all 64 VC4 containers will be needed the LO switch card SF10G has to be inserted at
another traffic slot but not on slot 301.

SF2G5/SF10G - Card Protection - Slot 301/302

In case the LO switch card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 shall be used as Card Protection (CP)
it has to be configured during first commissioning. Changing the card type of the LO switch
card SF2G5/SF10G on slot 302 from "working" to "protection" is not possible if cross
connections already exists.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 57
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.7 IF2M / IF345M Card Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf,
via the Module View, e.g. by using the context menu of a IF2M or IF345M symbol ->
Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

Possible card states:

enabled; unavailable; wrong card type; wrong card version; wrong software.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Current Selected Low Order Switching Fabric

Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.

58 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Monitored channel NE

One of the channels of the card can be switched to the monitor port (PDH-in and PDH-out
simultaneously).

Monitored Channel Direction (for IF345M only)

PDH-in or PDH-out can be set.

Used in Protection

Indicates if the card is used in a protection.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 59
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.8 Card Configuration for SDH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SDH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Current Selected Switching Fabric

Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

60 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.9 IFS40G-MX Card Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the IFS40G-MX symbol -> Configuration...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Connection 40G Reference:

Type of Connection Reference

Relates to the fiber interconnection between the IFS40G-MX and IFS10G type cards.

Internal: Interconnection within the same NE.

External: Interconnection to another NE.

Connection Reference

In case of Internal interconnection, the connected IFS10G type cards must be configured
correctly.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 61
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.10 Card Configuration for ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Card...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

Current Selected Switching Fabric

Displays the selected working or protecting switching fabric.

Selected T0 Bus

Displays which T0 clock pulse (X or Y Bus) has been selected. The cards needn't have
selected the same clock pulse.

Carries Traffic Connections

Displays the current connections.

VLAN Concentrator Functionality State:

VLAN cards can be configured in 3 different modes:

62 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

P2P – Point to Point mode

Card is working as standard gigabit traffic card like IFQGBE / -E without VLAN functionality.
All 4 ETH ports are switched ON.

VLAN C – VLAN Concentrator mode

Card is working in pure VLAN mode with 2 concentrators.


ETH port #1 = concentrator #1
ETH port #3 = concentrator #2
ETH port #2 and ETH port #4 are switched off in this mode

Mixed – Mixed mode

Card is working in a mixed mode with


ETH port #1 and ETH port #2 running in P2P mode, without VLAN functionality.
ETH port #3 is working as VLAN concentrator #2.
ETH port #4 is switched off.

Note: A change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the card settings
( i.e. GFP/VLAN ID assignments, ...). Only the selected template does not have to be deleted.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 63
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.11 IFSO* Cards Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFSOB symbol -> Configuration...

Card State

Displays whether a card works normally or not.

User Label

Contains network-specific information about the relevant card. It can be entered by the
operator. The text can consist of a maximum of 128 characters.

Enable Transfer of Error Log After Startup

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the startup error log of the card. If the
checkbox is set, the Startup History Log protocol is updated in the SOH card for each startup
of a card.

64 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6.12 Port Provisioning Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an interface
card -> Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

In this window, you can select the working or protection mode of the card.

In case of an optical interface card:


Before a protection can be configured, the port(s) must be set to the projected protection type.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 65
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

7 Timing

7.1 Synchronous Equipment Clock Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC...

In this window, you can configure timing sources that are used for synchronization. Each
timing source besides internal timing can be configured according to priorities. Internal timing
always has the lowest priority. The timing source, when available, with the highest priority is
used for the timing derivation.

A green hook or red cross symbol next to the T0 Prio field indicates the lockout state. If a
timing source is locked out (red cross), it is generally not available as a synchronization
reference.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 67
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

You can toggle the lockout state by clicking this lockout symbol separately for each T1 and T3
timing source.

Currently selected timing sources for the clock pulses T0 and T4 are displayed by means of
an arrow. The arrow displays the mode as set in the T0 and T4 configuration windows. For
further information, see below ("Forced").

The SA bit used for SSM evaluation / insertion is configurable independently for T3 and T4.
The SA bit configuration is only effective with 2-Mbit/s mode operation.

Note:

T4 Clock (T4C): The T4C output transmits a 2048 kHz signal and is squelched in case of:

• Reference source is not available in fource mode

• None of the configured reference sources is available in automatic or manual mode

• Manually by the operator command "OFF"

• In the mode "forced T0" if T0 is in holdover or free running mode

• QL enabled (use SSM for selection) and the quality of the reference clock is lower than
the configured threshold; selectable thresholds are: 2-PRC, 4-SSU_T, 8-SSu_L, 11-
SEC, 0-off

T4 Data (T4D): The T4D output transmits a 2048 kbit/s signal (CRC4) and will be squelched
in the same cases as T4C too. For the squelch state, the clock will be diverted from T0, and
"DNU" will be inserted into the SA-bit (SA=FFh).

The modes involved are as follows:

Auto:
The system selects from the configured timing sources, according to the assigned priority, the
best clock pulse. For the same quality, the value of the set priority is decisive (1 = very good/6
= very bad/do not use).

Forced:
You can determine which timing source is used. If the selected timing source fails, a second
arrow displays Selected in the Holdover field. The Forced arrow remains on the selected
timing source. If the timing source can be used again, the second arrow disappears after
expiry of the Wait to Restore Time. Here assigned priorities have no meaning.
The jump from higher timing quality to lower timing quality is accepted immediately.
The jump back from lower timing quality to higher timing quality is only accepted after expiry
of the time set in the Wait to Restore Time box. This applies to the modes Forced and Auto.

If an existing synchronization with a configurable set of reference clock pulse sources is no


longer available, the SEC switches from synchronous operation to the Holdover mode.

If the SEC cannot be synchronized with any external clock pulse source, it changes to the
Free Running mode.

68 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Use SSM for Selection checkbox


With this attribute, you configure if the selection process of timing sources considers the
Quality Level (= enable) or not (= disable).

The received timing marker contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received
STM signal. It is 4 bits wide and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are
used. All other values are treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the
DNU display, the received value is the displayed.

S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level

xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1

xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2

xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3

xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4

xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5

xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6

How to Configure the Timing

How to Set Sync Priorities

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 69
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

7.2 T0 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC... -> T0 -> Configuration...

Timing Source in Use for T0

Displays the current T0 timing source.

Requested Timing Source for T0

The T0 clock pulse can be derived from

• one of the T3 clock pulses (external),

• T1 clock pulses (if an SDH signal is used as timing reference),

• the NE internal clock generator (free running), in case no clock input is available.

- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses.


- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.

How to Configure the Timing

T1 Configuration

T3 / T4 Configuration

70 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

7.3 T1 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC... -> T1 -> Configuration...

Timing References Tab

Allows to select the T1 timing references and displays the dedicated Synchronous Status
Message (SSMs) information.

WTR Tab

Displays WTR information of the T1 timing references and allows to clear the WTR.

How to Configure the Timing

T0 Configuration

T3 / T4 Configuration

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 71
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

7.4 T3 / T4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> SEC... -> T3 or T4 -> Configuration...

T3:

T3 2 MHz SSM

Allows to set the quality level of the T3 clock by selecting a timing marker.
This is necessary, because T3 as a 2.048 MHz normal timing does not contain its own SSM.
The timing marker quality level is displayed in front of the selection field.

Quality level Quality level Description


type (decimal value)

PRC 2 Primary Reference Clock:


the normally used high-accuracy timing
source

SSU-T 4 Synchronization Supply Unit Transit

SSU-L 8 Synchronization Supply Unit Local

SEC 11 Synchronous Equipment Clock:


NE internal timing source

T3 SSM Mode

The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.

72 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

T3 Received SSMs

Displays the received quality level information.

Clear WTR T3(1) / T3(2) SSM

Allows to clear the T3(1) and T3(2) WTR times.

T4:

Timing Source in Use for T4

Displays the current T4 timing source.


In the holdover and free-running modes, the T0 clock pulse has reduced frequency and phase
quality. In this case, the T4 clock pulse is switched off (squelched).

Requested Timing Source for T4

- Auto Selection is based on the quality of the available clock pulses.


- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received quality
levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not override
the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.
- Off disconnects the T4 output.

T4 Mode

The 2-Mbit/s mode supports the handling of SSMs in the timing signal, the 2-MHz mode does
not support this handling.

Minimum Quality Threshold for T4

Allows to set the minimum quality level of the T4 clock by selecting a timing marker (see
above table).

T3/T4:

SSU Loop
Allows to configure the Synchronization Supply Unit in a loop.

T3/T4 Mode

Allows to select the 2-MHz or 2-Mbit/s mode in case of an SSU loop.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 73
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

How to Configure the Timing

T0 Configuration

T1 Configuration

74 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8 Alarms

8.1 Alarm List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

The window displays the alarm information concerning the whole NE in detail.

The window contains a Current and a History tab. Each tab contains a list containing alarm
entries and checkboxes for setting filter options for the list. The list uses the option report style
for labeling and sorting the list columns.

In the list, one list entry (one line) corresponds to one alarm.

Current tab:

The tab always displays the actually raised alarms. The actual alarm state
(acknowledged/unacknowledged) and the alarm severity are displayed. Filter checkboxes
(show alarms with severity) for the alarm severities and the alarm states are available.

One alarm entry of the current alarm list consists of:

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 75
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Location <card name>_<slot number> (.<port number> <bit rate> #<channel


number>)

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

State Either unacknowledged or acknowledged

Time Date and time of alarm

Additionally, if the alarm is unacknowledged, the alarm indicator is displayed with a blue
outline.

Context Menu

Each single alarm entry or multiple list entries of the current list can be selected. For the
selected list entries a context menu is available (right mouse click). It provides the alarm
acknowledge. If an alarm is acknowledged, the displayed state of the existing list entry is
changed. If an alarm is cleared, the corresponding list entry is deleted from the current tab.

Show alarms with severity

You can select, which alarm severity has to be displayed.

Show alarms with state

You can select, whether acknowledged or unacknowledged alarms are displayed.

Alarm Counter

Displays the number of alarms that are counted according to their severity.

History tab:

The tab is a historical log containing all alarm events notified by the NE for the time the LCT is
online. Only filter checkboxes for the alarm severities are available. The list contains one
particular list entry for each notified alarm event of one alarm

raised

cleared (= no alarm)

76 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The VC alarms are reported by the interface/switching cards. The assignment IPU-
channel/Interface card take place by a list.

The alarm suppression has no influence to the HEL (History Event Log) entry.

Alarm entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten.

One alarm entry of the history alarm list consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Location <slot number> (.<port number> (<channel number>)

Alarm Alarm name

Severity Level of severity - critical, major, minor and warning

Event raised, cleared

Time Time and date of alarm.

Show alarms with severity

The alarm severity is displayed and can be selected.

Click Clear History to clear the entire list.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

How to Suppress Alarms

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 77
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.2 NEAP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Configuration -> NEAP...

The window gives an overview of the possible alarms with their most important details and
allows to configure the alarm severities.

Column Description

Alarm Type Communication or Equipment

Location Logical correlation or signal type

Alarm Name Alarm designation

Object Involved path or unit

Severity Major, Minor, or No

78 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.3 Equipment Alarms

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
or of a card symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all equipment alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.

One alarm entry consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 79
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

How to Suppress Alarms

Communication Alarms

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

80 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.4 Communication Alarms

This window is accessible via the Port Connections (using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list) -> Subview ...-> STM-n -> Fault -> Communications
Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.

One alarm entry consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 81
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

Notes:

LofDel alarm will also be raised if the other end of the VC-path is terminated on an IFOFES-E
card and is not assigned to any port.

VC3 LOM will be raised, if a cross connection exists, but the relating virtual concatenated VC
is not assigned with the IFOFES-E card at the far end.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

How to Suppress Alarms

Equipment Alarms

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

82 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.5 Communication Alarm Feature Table


IMPORTANT!

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL manual (Operator
Guidelines).

Communication Alarms

Object Alarm Severity Description Remedial Action

ETH OPT TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination

ETH OPT TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.

ETH OPT TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client

ETH OPT TTP TD Major Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned


SFP soon.

ETH OPT TTP TF Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned


SFP.

ETH EL TTP FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
remote Ethernet device.
termination

ETH EL TTP Link Down Major Ethernet interface fail Check the Ethernet
connection of the
concerned card.
If it is correct, the card
must be replaced.

ETH EL TTP Remote Major Fault indication from Check client equipment
client

GFP Group LofDel Major Delineation problem Check the quality of both,
of the GFP Group the SDH and the Ethernet
traffic

3/9 o´ Clock LofDel Major Delineation problem Check the quality of both,
of the GFP Group the SDH and the Ethernet
serving the ring traffic
interfaces of RPR

MS AIS Minor Alarm Indication Fault not in home device.


Signal

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 83
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

MS SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

MS SSF Minor Server Signal Fail Check the concerned


configuration settings.

MS RDI Warning Remote Defect Check the output signal of


Indicator the card, which may have
prompted the RDI alarm. If
it is correct, the concerned
card must be replaced.

AU4 LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LTI T0 Major Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T0 is correct, the card must
be replaced.

SYNC LOF T3 #1,#2 Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LOM T3 Minor Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of


#1,#2 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LT4 Minor Loss of T4 Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LTI T4 Minor Loss of Timing Input Check the timing input. If it
T4 is correct, the card must
be replaced.

SYNC LTS T1 #1.. Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
#8 T1 #1.. #8 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

SYNC LTS T3 #1 #2 Minor Loss Of Timing Signal Check the input signal of
T3 #1, #2 the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

OS, LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of


OS-CO, the concerned card. If it is
OS-PA correct, the card must be
replaced.

84 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

OS, TxFail Major Transmit Fail Replace the concerned


OS-CO, SFP.
OS-PA

OS, TxDeg Minor Transmit Degraded Replace the concerned


OS-CO, SFP soon.
OS-PA

RPR Switch RPR 3o´ Minor Link failure at 3 o' Fault not in the home
Clock Span clock span device.
Fail

RPR Switch RPR 9o´ Minor Link failure at 9 o' Fault not in the home
Clock Span clock span device.
Fail

RPR Switch FOT Major Fail of topology Fault not in the home
device.

RPR-LOG- FE Link Down Major Problem on the Fault not in the home
PORT remote Ethernet device.
termination

RS TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace


Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

RS LOF Minor Loss of Frame Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

RS LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

TU LOP Major Loss of Pointer Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

VC4 (CTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC4 (CTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.

VC4 (CTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC4 (TTP) LOM Major Loss of Multiframe Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 85
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

VC4 (TTP) PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

VC4 (TTP) TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace
Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC4 (TTP) UNEQ Major Unequipped VC4 Fault not in home device.

VC4 (TTP) SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

E12 LOS Major Loss of Signal Check the input signal of


the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Dem LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Dem AIS Minor Alarm Indication Fault not in home device.
Signal

P12 Dem EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If the alarm
persists, replace the card.

P12 Map LOF Major Loss of Frame Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

P12 Map EXC Minor Excessive bit error Put the card into a loop
rate circuit. If still an EXC alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

P12 Map SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop
circuit. If still an SD alarm
is detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC12 PLM Major Pay Load Mismatch Check the input signal of
the concerned card. If it is
correct, the card must be
replaced.

86 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

VC12 TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace


Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC12 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC12 Fault not in home device.

VC12 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

VC3 TIM Major Trace Identifier Check the Trail Trace


Mismatch Expected and Received
configurations, they must
be equal.

VC3 UNEQ Major Unequipped VC3 Fault not in home device.

VC3 SD Minor Signal Degraded Put the card into a loop


circuit. If still a SD alarm is
detected, the card
concerned must be
replaced.

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 87
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.6 E3/VC3 Alarms

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack port list,
by using the context menu of an IF345M card port symbol -> Subview... -> E3/VC3 -> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.

One alarm entry consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name

88 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

How to Suppress Alarms

Equipment Alarms

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 89
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.7 1:N MSP Alarms

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1: N protection) -> Subview... ->
1:N MSP -> Fault -> Communication Alarms...

This window is available for symbols directly representing an NE object/container with alarm
information. The window displays all communication alarm information concerning this
object/container in detail.

The alarm window has one particular entry for each possible alarm of this object/container.

One alarm entry consists of:

Column Description

Alarm Severity Indicator

Object Object name

Alarm Alarm name

90 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Severity Level of severity: major, minor, warning or "without alarm"

State Either unacknowledged, acknowledged or no alarm

Suppression A suppressed alarm is not shown in the Alarm List or by the


red color of the symbol.

No Alarm Report (Only with communication alarms that support reporting)


An alarm with disabled alarm report is shown in the Alarm List
or by the red color of the symbol.

The alarm display in the alarm window is not influenced by the configured alarm severity
threshold. Additionally, unacknowledged alarms display a blue frame around the indicator.

How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

How to Suppress Alarms

Equipment Alarms

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 91
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.8 TIF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol

-> Configuration -> TIF...

In this window, you can enter individual TIF line names and configure the TIF input polarity for
alarm activation, according to your own requirement for telemetry tasks.

How to Configure TIF Ports

92 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

8.9 TCA List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

Sorting Scheme (mouse-click on the column header)

The lists on both tabs can be sorted in the following way.

Column sorted by

Object TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by objects in ascending order. (Entries of one
object are sorted by location, TCA, event, time.)

Location TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by locations in ascending order. (Entries of
one location are sorted by object, alarm, event, time.)

TCA TCA entries are alphabetically sorted by TCAs in ascending order. (Entries of one
alarm are sorted by object, location, event, time.)

Event TCA entries are sorted to raised and cleared. (Entries of one event are sorted by
object, location, TCA, time.)

Time The most recent TCA entry is written on the top. (Entries of one time are sorted by
object, location, TCA, event.)

Click Clear History to delete all entries in the History list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 93
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Current Tab:

The list on the Current tab contains only actually raised TCAs. The actual state (raised) is
displayed.

One TCA entry consists of:

Column Description

Object Object name

Location <card name>_<slot number>.<port> (<bit rate>) <object name>

TCA TCA name

History Tab:

The list on the History tab is a historical log that contains all TCA events notified by the NE as
long as the LCT is online.

The list contains one particular list entry for each notified TCA event of one TCA

Event: raised, cleared.

TCA entries contained in the history list are not deleted or overwritten automatically .

The displayed time is the time the NE notified the TCA event based on the NE-Time. This
time entry is not overridden by the time stamp contained in the response to a TCA request
initiated by the LCT, provided that the response contains the same TCA.

The maximum number of TCA list entries in the history TCA list is 1000 (configurable in the
Registry).

94 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9 Basic Traffic Flow and Selection Windows

9.1 STM-1 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFO155M port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 95
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.2 STM-4 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

96 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.3 STM-4 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFQ622M port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-4 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 97
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.4 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> 16x AU4/VC4 -> Subview....

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

98 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.5 STM-16 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS2G5 port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-16 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 99
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.6 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFS10G
type symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus

100 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.7 STM-64 Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS10G port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Note:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 101
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.8 ETH Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
Ethernet port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the Ethernet traffic flow symbols of the selected port and gives access to
the context menus.

Notes:

In the headline, only the working card is shown.

Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.

102 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.9 E12 or E3 Traffic Flow

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M or IF345M port symbol respectively ->
Subview...

This window shows the E12 or E3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 103
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.10 VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of the
card symbol with activated concatenation -> Configuration VC4 configuration MUX-VC4 or
VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4 #n Configuration...

VC4 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

104 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label:

By default, the signal label is defined by the signal type (PDH, Ethernet, etc.). However, the
user can overwrite the signal label for particular applications.

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

VC4 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

There are two modes:

Enabled:

Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS into all LO VCs of this VC4. For ETH
cards, the AIS insertion causes a remote insertion towards the ETH port (Tx).
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 105
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

VC4 Mux Preparation (if offered)

Set the checkbox separately for each TUG-3 to prapare the 21 x TU-12 mux structure.

106 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

9.11 VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a switch fabric
card symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the VC4 (Mux) #n traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 107
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10 Protection Traffic Flow

10.1 1:N MSP Protected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with protected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 109
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.2 1:N MSP Unprotected Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol (with unprotected 1:N MSP) in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context
menu.

110 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.3 STM-1 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFO155M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-1 traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 111
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.4 STM-4 Prepared MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQ622M protection symbol with prepared MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the traffic flow symbol and gives access to its context menu.

112 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.5 STM-1 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFO155M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 113
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.6 STM-4 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M symbol with installed 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview...

This window shows the 1+1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

114 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.7 STM-16 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 115
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.8 STM-64 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G type protection symbol created 1+1 MSP or 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the STM-64 traffic flow symbols and gives access to its context menu.

How to Create / Delete 1+1 MSP Line Protections

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

116 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.9 STM-1 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFO155M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 117
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.10 STM-4 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFQ622M port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

118 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.11 STM-16 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 119
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.12 STM-64 1:1 MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of IFS10G type port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the 1:1 MSP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

120 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.13 STM-16 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 121
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.14 STM-16 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

122 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.15 STM-16 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS2G5 protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 123
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.16 STM-64 Prepared 2F-SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G protection symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

124 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.17 STM-64 2F-SPRING Extra Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS10G type port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) ->
Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 125
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.18 STM-64 Prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G type protection symbol with prepared 4F-SPRING or MSP protection ->
Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

126 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

10.19 4F SPRING Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of an
IFS2G5 port symbol with created 4F-SPRING protection -> Subview...

This window shows the protection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 127
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

11 Protection Selection Windows

11.1 VC4 Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview...

This window shows the VC4 Selection traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 129
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

12 Traffic Configuration

12.1 Port Configuration

This window is accessible via the Port connections, by using the context menu of an interface
card symbol in the port list -> Port Configuration... or Configuration -> Port...

Connector Location Distributor

Here you can enter data for the port represented by the physical trail termination object
containing the connector location at distributor.

Connector Location NE

Contains the information, with which port of the connection field of the NE the cables have
been connected.

Port Operational State

Displays the running operation mode.

Loopback (if applicable)

Selection to enable or to disable internal loops.

Fibre Mode (if applicable)

Selection of the fibre mode: Dual Fibre or Single Fibre

Used in Protection (if applicable)

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 131
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Indicates if the card is used in a protection.

Used as Timing Source (if applicable)

Indicates if the card is used as a timing source.

Carries Traffic Connections (if applicable)

Displays the current connections.

Carries Overhead Connections (if applicable)

Displays the current overhead connections.

132 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

12.2 Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 133
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration table) -> Port Config...

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

Port VLAN ID [1..4094]

Select the required Port VLAN ID number.

Frame Priority [0..7]

Specify the frame priority.

CUG Mode Selection

Select the CUG mode:

134 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

Single:

The CUG Management button is active to open the Single CUG Management
Configuration window.

Multi1:

The window is extended by the Multi1 area with the following fields:

Max. Number Of CUGs

Select the max. number of CUGs.

Max. VLAN Range

Select the max. VLAN range.

CUG ID Offset [0..4093]

Select the CUG ID offset.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.

After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi1 CUG
Management Configuration window.

Multi2:

The window is extended by the Multi2 area with two selection fields, to move Possible
CUG ID values to the CUG ID list.

After clicking Apply, a warning message is displayed informing you that the traffic will
be interrupted.

After clicking Yes, the CUG Management button is active to open the Multi2 CUG
Management Configuration window.

CUG Management

This button opens the appropriate CUG Management Configuration window.

PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration

PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration

PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 135
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

12.3 STM-N Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an optical
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-N -> Configuration...

OS tab:

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

136 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

Force Laser Shutdown

The force laser shutdown immediately shuts down the laser transmitter.

Automatic Laser Shutdown

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the automatic laser shutdown. When
enabled, the laser transmitter is shut down if there is no input signal.
If the Single Fiber Mode is configured (i. e. the Tx and Rx signals are to be combined into one
single fiber), ALS should be enabled.

Laser Restart Pulse Width [2..100s]

Displays the configured time the laser is switched on during the automatic and manual laser
restart period.

Manual Laser Restart

If the manual laser restart is set, it will restart the laser manually.

No Optical Preamplifier Connected (Normal Mode) (if applicable)

The checkbox is set, if no optical preamplifier is used.

Laser Data:

Contains information about the state of the laser and the optical receiver of the optical
interface.

RS tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Enabling the trail trace identifier insertion.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

If checkbox is set:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
There is no influence to PM counters.

No checkbox setting:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 137
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Automatic Link Information

If this checkbox is enabled, the NE automatically inserts a value into the sent RS trace, which
defines the source port. This feature shall be used for automatic link detection.

Actually Transmitted:

This string is the RS trace generated by the NE, for use with automatic link detection.

Transmitted / Expected:

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G.831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received:

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

MS tab:

M0 Byte Enable Switch

Disable: only M1-byte is used for REI transmission


Enable: additional M0-byte is used for REI transmission

Note: In case of interworking with SL64, disable the M0-byte switch.

Received Timing Marker

Contains the timing quality of the reference timing of a received STM signal. It is 4 bits wide
and there are 16 different values. Only six of these values are used. All other values are
treated in the same way as the DNU (don’t use) value. Behind the DNU display, the received
value is the displayed.

S1 (bin) SSM (hex) Display Quality level

xxxx 0010 2 PRC Q1

xxxx 0100 4 SSU-T Q2

xxxx 1000 8 SSU-L Q3

xxxx 1011 B SEC Q4

xxxx 0000 0 quality unknown Q5

xxxx 1111 F DNU (don’t use) Q6

138 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

Overwrite Received SSM

The quality level of the SSM from the received STM-N can be overridden by different clock
source qualities before being passed to the SETS selection process.

Force don’t use for Sync

By activating this checkbox, you can prevent that the other NE-Party uses this signal as
timing source.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...192000]

Specifies how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 139
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

12.4 AU4/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Configuration...

AU4/VC4 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

If Supervision is active, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/N.

If Supervision is inactive, the related vcCtp is enabled for triggering a SNCP/I only.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]

Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

Displays how many blocks received per second must be errored in order to declare a Bad
Second for SD detection (if SD is cleared).

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

140 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies, how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

VC4 Trail Trace tab:

TTI Processing

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two fields
expected and received TTI are displayed.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 141
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

12.5 VC3/VC12 Configuration CTP

For VC3:
This window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> TU3 #n -> Configuration...

For VC12:
The window is accessible via the module view, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation tab -> 21 x TU-12 activated -> Apply -> Close.
In the VC4 Mux #n Strukture window, select one of the numbered VC12 symbols (e.g. 1.1.1)
-> Configuration...

VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 8000, for VC12 2000)

The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

142 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The two types,
expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

There are two modes:

Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored butin case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria at LO switching matrix.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 143
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

12.6 VC3/VC12 Configuration TTP

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, via the
port connections, by using the context menu of an IF345M / IF2M symbol in the port list ->
Subview... -> VC3 / VC12 -> Configuration...

VC3 / VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second (for VC3 = 8000, for VC12 = 2000)

The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

144 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (for VC3 = B3, for VC12 = BIP2).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label:

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

VC3 / VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

There are two modes:

Enabled:
Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:
Received TTI is monitored but, in case of TIM no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption; for IF2M/IF345M with insertion of AIS towards the port, for
ETH cards with insertion of Remote towards the ETH port.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 145
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII

The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within the
range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

146 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

12.7 ETH Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an Ethernet card symbol -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Configuration

Supervision

With this field, the supervision can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

If the supervision mode is automatic, the monitoring state goes enabled, as soon as a signal
at the ETH input is present. Subsequently the state stays enabled, independent whether the
ETH signal is present.

Asymmetric Flow Control (to link partner)

If the asymmetric flow control is enabled, pause frames will be generated and transmitted to
the link partner if

- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured bandwidth in the ETH-GFP assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,

- ETH Rx traffic exceeds the configured VC capacity in the GFP-SDH assignment table of the
"GFP Assignment" window,

- with subchanneling, when the sum of Rx traffic exceeds the VC capacity.

Notes: Incoming pause frames (send by the link partner) will be dropped. Hence the NE will
not reduce the speed.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 147
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Attention: If 2 ETH ports of the SURPASS hiT 7070 are connected with each other, then the
following will occur:
In case of excessive ETH traffic inputs, both partners will send pause frames, but neither will
react to these pause frames. Therefore, frames may be lost with high bit rate und different
admission control or VC capacity.

Auto-negotiation (only with IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFOFE-E or IFOFES-E card)

Normal position is "On advertised 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s". Only for older LAN / WAN
equipment which didn’t support an "Automatic Negotiation Control" the setting should be "Off
Forced 10 Mbit/s" or "Off Forced 100 Mbit/s".

Remote Fault Indication

Enabled:
Remote fault will be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, if the SDH route is disturbed, or
the ETH port at the other end of the route receives Remote. If Remote is inserted, the ETH
link partner raises Remote alarm.
Furthermore, in case Remote fault is to be inserted into the outgoing ETH signal, the MAC on
the cards will get disabled completely. Therefore no Ethernet packets are sent any longer in
both directions (i.e. neither in receive nor in transmit direction). As a consequence also the
packet performance counters in ingress direction (i.e. ETH -> SDH) will not count any longer.

Note:

If more information about faults in the SDH link are to be required, it is advisable to enable the
SSF and RDI fault indication on the Ethernet cards.
The SSF will indicate an SDH problem on the egress direction (SDH --> ETH) which will
consequently lead to the remote fault indication to the client port.
Furthermore RDI will be inserted in the SDH TX direction that will indicate the original sending
card that the downlink direction has a problem.

Disabled:
The Tx output signal will be switched OFF, if the SDH route is disturbed, or the ETH port at
the other end of the route receives Remote. If the port is switched OFF, the ETH link partner
raises LinkDown. This feature is useful if the link partner is a router which considers a
physical link down as one of the criteria for starting a re-routing process (e.g. a redundant
path is available).

Laser Data:

Input Power Level [dBm]

Displays the current input power level.

Transmit Frequency [THz]

Displays the current transmit frequency.

Receive Frequency [THz]

Displays the current receive frequency.

148 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

Note: To show the frequencies in [nm], go to the Main window -> Options -> Settings... ->
Frequency Display: set to Wavelength [nm]. This feature is not applicable for 100 FX Agilent
SFPs.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 149
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

12.8 E12 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack, port list,
by using the context menu of an IF2M port symbol -> Subview... -> E12 -> Configuration...

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

P12

AIS Insertion Towards Port

The AIS insertion to E12 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.

150 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Protection Selection Windows

P12 Mapping Supervision

Port Connection Supervision

disabled = no supervision

enabled = supervision on SD, EXC and LOF in mapping direction

The supervision is only relevant, if the port monitoring is enabled.

If the incoming 2-Mbit/s signal is used as timing source for the clock pulses T0 and
T4, the signal must be framed and the port connection supervision must be enabled.

CRC-4 Monitoring

This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC monitor function in mapping direction.
If the switch is
disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC processing is
only relevant, if the port connection supervision and the port monitoring are enabled.

P12 Demapping Processing

Supervision/Retiming

This attribute allows to enable the retiming function for outgoing 2 Mbit/s signals. If enabled,
the 2-Mbit/s signal in mapping direction is synchronized to the T0 clock. The signal is then
supervised on AIS, EXC and LOF. If disabled, the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal is not supervised
and is transmitted transparently.
The retimed signal can have frame slips, these slips depends on the frequency offset
between the origin PDH signal and the T0. If retiming is enabled, the T0-configuration of the
SEC-configuration is not to be configured as "Free Running" or "Holdover" mode. So a
reference clock source must be available. If not the outgoing 2-Mbit/s signal will have AIS.

CRC-4 Insertion/Monitoring

This attribute allows to enable/disable the CRC processing function in demapping direction. If
the checkbox is Disabled, no CRC-4 communication alarm will be generated. The CRC
Processing attribute is only relevant, if the retiming Switch Demapper NE and the termination
port monitoring are enabled. The supervision of AIS, EXC and LOF is only relevant, if the
termination port monitoring is enabled.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 151
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

12.9 E3 Configuration

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack or a
microshelf, port list, by using the context menu of an IF345M port symbol -> Subview... -> E3
-> Configuration...

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

P3

AIS Insertion Towards Port

The AIS insertion to P3 allows to insert a manual AIS towards the PDH port.

152 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

13 Multiplex Structure

13.1 VC4 Multiplex Structure

This window is accessible via the Module View in the port list, by the context menu of a
PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a VC4 (Mux)
#n symbol [with activated mux structure]) -> Subview...

This window shows the VC4 Mux traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 153
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14 Cross Connections

14.1 Cross Connections List

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

In this window, you can set filter options and add, delete and display CCs (cross
connections).

There are different CC types as follows:

1. Unidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set:


CP1, indicating the CP used as connection start point
CP2, indicating the CP used as connection end point

2. Bidirectional (unprotected) CC, with CP parameter set:


CP1, indicating the 1st CP used as connection start/end point
CP2, indicating the 2nd CP used as connection start/end point

3. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) head end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection end point
CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point

4. Unidirectional (protected for SNCP) tail end CC, with CP parameter set:
CP1(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start point
CP1(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start point
CP2, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection end point

5. Bidirectional (protected for SNCP) CC, with CP parameter set:


CP1, indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point
CP2(W), indicating the (worked) CP used as connection start/end point
CP2(P), indicating the (protected) CP used as connection start/end point

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 155
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

6. Combined CCs are the ones, using the Low Order SF card, which means that more
than on CC is used. This include both complete and incomplete CCs, that have more
than one CC.

7. Complete CCs are all, where traffic passes, this means those that have VC4 TPs in the
end. This can be a normal CC between two VC4 or combined CC, that use the LO SF
card.

8. Incomplete CCs are the ones, where traffic doesn't pass usually, because a CC is
missing to make a complete combined CC. This are usually CCs between a HO card
and the LO card or a combination, which includes also a CC between the LO card, but
no other CC from the LO to an HO card.

The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.

With an IFQGBE-E, IFOFE-E or IFQGBE card cross connection, the GFP Assignment...
button opens the GFP Assignment window.

With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.

How to Create a Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

How to Add and Remove Path Protections

How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection

How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR

How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options

How to Delete a Cross Connection

156 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14.2 Plain Cross Connections List

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> Plain List...

The plain cross connection list shows the real existing physical cross connections. In this
window, you can add, modify, delete and display cross connections.

The Add... button opens the Add Cross Connection window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection
window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Disconnect... button deletes that cross connection.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details
window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection
Graphic Details window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic
window.

The GFP Assignment... button opens the SDH GFP Assignment window.

How to Create a Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 157
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

How to Add and Remove Path Protections

How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection

How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR

How to Set Cross Connection Filter Options

How to Delete a Cross Connection

158 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14.3 Add Cross Connection

This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Add.

This window allows to create a new cross connection.

The selected CC Type is displayed graphically. A dashed line indicates the protection path.

After selecting VC Level, Card and TP, the "To TP A >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP A field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B field in the New CC area.
After selection another card and/or TP, the "To TP B' >>" button copies the selected TP to the
TP B’ field in the New CC area (in case of a protected cross connection).
The Reset TPs button clears all selected TPs in the New CC area.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 159
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Note:

The VC-Level LCAS-VC12-nv/VC3-nv is a possibilty to connect the complete VC group from


the ETH card to a SDH card.
It can only be used, if the members of a VC group are adjacent (e.g. LCAS-VC12-5v 1.1.1,
1.2.1, 1.3.1, 1.2.1, 1.2.2). Otherwise the LCT connects VC12 which are not in the VC group.
In the TP index field of the TPs, the first member of the group must be selected as TP (i.e.
1.1.1 of the LCAS-VC12-5v).

The Propose Connection button defines the new connection and inserts it into the cross
connection list.

The Connect button creates the cross connection.

In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.

The Details... button opens the Cross Connection Details window.

The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

How to Create a Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-ETH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an RPR

160 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14.4 Cross Connection Details

This window is accessible e.g. via the main menu -> Cross Connections -> List... -> (select an
entry in the list) -> Details...

After selecting a list entry by clicking in one of the TP columns, the selected TP is displayed
below.

The Config... button opens the AU4/VC4 Configuration window

With an IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFOFES-E, IFOFGE, IFQGBE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-


E card cross connection, the GFP Assignment... button opens the GFP Assignment window.

With an LNQ622M cross connection, the Link Connection... button opens the Extension Link
Protection Traffic Flow window.

After selecting a list entry the following buttons are active:

The Modify... button opens the Modify Cross Connection window.

The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window

The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

The Concat members... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Details window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 161
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14.5 Cross Connections Graphic

This window is accessible e.g. via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections... -> Graphic...

This window is a graphical illustration of the configured cross connections and involved cards,
sorted by cross connection protocols.

The SF160G card contains the HO cross connections represented by the lines in the HO CC
column of the Graphic view. This card is not displayed by itself because it has no own
termination points.
The SF2G5 cards contain the LO cross connections represented by the lines in the LO CC
column.

If you click a graphical connecting line, the involved cards are highlighted.

Protection is not displayed in the Graphic view.

162 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Add...

Opens the Add Cross Connection window.

List...

Opens the Cross Connections List window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 163
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14.6 Cross Connection Graphic Details

This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button

-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Graphic Details...

This window shows the TP relations of the selected cross connection. The context menus of
the symbols allow to display the Graphic Details of the next entry in the Cross Connections
List, if applicable.

164 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14.7 Modify Cross Connection

This window is accessible via the Cross Connection List toolbar button

-> (with an entry selected in the Cross Connections list) -> Details... -> (with an entry
selected in the Cross Connection Details list) -> Modify...

This window allows to modify the CC type and TP selection of an existing cross connection.

The Add Protection button allows to add a protection to an existing cross connection.

The Swap and Add Protection button swaps TP A and TP B termination points and adds a
TP B' termination point.

The Remove Work. Path button removes the working path of an existing protected cross
connection.

The Remove Prot. Path button removes the protecting path of an existing protected cross
connection.

The Disconnect button opens a window with a traffic interrupt warning, for disconnect the
selected connection.

The Details... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

The Graphic Details... button opens the Cross Connection Graphic Details window.

The Graphic... button opens the Cross Connections Graphic window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 165
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14.8 Overhead Cross Connections

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross Connections...

In this window, you can create and display various bidirectional OH Cross Connections.

OH TP List tab:

Filter:

The OH Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.

The OH TP List displays all OH termination points.

Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading (including the first
column).

166 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Column Description

(Symbol) Indication if this TP is involved in an OH CC

or not

The symbol is marked by a blue frame, if the TP is already set as


TP A or TP B, but not yet connected.

OH Termination Point Details about involved subrack, slot, port and card and OH type.

Connection State Either Connected, if the termination point is involved in a Cross


Connection or Free, if the termination point is not involved.

OH CC Type <type of TP A> - <Type of TP B>

Direction Displays the direction type of the OH TP

Involved As One of: TPA, TPB

If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP A button sets it as TP A for a new OH CC.

If a list entry is selected, the Set as TP B button sets it as TP B for a new OH CC.

If a list entry with connected OH CC is selected, the Select OH CC button displays details
about the OH CC in the New OH Cross Connection field.

Before a new OH CC is connected, the TP A and TP B settings can be reset using the Reset
TPs button.

The Connect button creates a new OH CC.

OH CC List tab:
Filter:

The Cross Connection list can be filtered by setting filter options.

The OH CC list displays all established Cross Connections.

Note: The OH TP List can be sorted by clicking any column heading.

One Cross Connection entry consists of:

Column Description

OH CC Type Cross Connection type.

Direction Displays the direction type of the OH CC type

TP A, TP B Termination points

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 167
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The Disconnect button deletes the selected OH CC from the list.

How to Create an OH Cross Connection

How to Set OH Cross Connection Filter Options

How to Delete OH Cross Connections

168 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

15 Protection Management

15.1 Protection Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol
-> Protection...

This window contains all prepared and created protection groups in the NE, depending on the
currently configured Required Equipping of the NE.

Column Description

Protection Symbol Red cross: not active; Green small hook: active

Type Type of protection switching

Exists either yes or no

Working/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/East <slot number> <card type> <port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Working/East <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protection/West <slot number> <card type>.<port> (<bit rate>) of the respective card

Protect. State State of protection switching

To change to a specific Traffic Flow window, double-click the appropriate list entry.

Create

Creates the selected protection in the list.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 169
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Add 1:N MSP ...

Opens the Add 1:N MSP window.

Add Link Protection

Opens the Add Extension Link Protection window.

Delete

Deletes the selected protection in the list.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

170 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

16 1 plus 1 MSP Protection

16.1 STM-N 1+1 MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an optical interface card symbol with created 1+1 MSP protection -> Subview... -> 1+1
MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (1 + 1).

Working

Displays the working port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting port.

MSP Control:

Active Line Section

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 171
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.

Protection Mode

In the list, the changeover type is displayed:


Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any 1+1 MSP protection switching.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.

Line Switching Type

Unidirectional or Bidirectional.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:

Availability State

Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:

Activated or De-activated.

Note:

If an IFO155M-E card protection is enabled and the working card has port loops enabled,
then in a case of protection switching the port loops from the working card are not propagated
to the protection card.

How to Configure and Activate 1+1 MSP Line Protections

172 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

17 1 to 1 MSP Protection

17.1 1:1 MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an SDH interface card port symbol (with created 1:1 MSP protection) -> Subview...
-> 1:1 MSP -> Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (1:1 MSP).

Working

Displays the working port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting port.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 173
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

MSP Control:

Active Line Section

Displays the line that is being used, whether the working or the protecting line.

Extra Traffic Squelch State

Displays the Extra Traffic Squelch State.

Protection Mode

In the list, the changeover type is displayed:


Revertive = returns to working after the problem in the working line has disappeared.
Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Lockout prevents any 1:1 MSP protection switching.
Exercise Switch is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can
be used for testing the K1/K2 protocol

Line Switching Type

Unidirectional or Bidirectional.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:

Availability State

Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

In the list, the protection switching function state can be selected:

Activated or De-activated.

174 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

18 1 to N MSP Protection

18.1 1:N MSP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> 1:N MSP ->
Configuration...

Line Architecture

Displays 1:N line architecture.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 175
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Protecting

Displays the protection card and port.

Working:

The list displays the port and allows to configure some protection settings.

The Extend... button opens the 1:N MSP Extension window.

The Reduce button removes the port from the list.

MSP Control:

Switching State

Displays the switching state.

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type:


Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

Allows to set the priority of the protection switching:

Clear (abort the WTR) requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.
Lockout prevents any 1:N MSP protection switching.
The Forced To command has a higher priority than the Manual To command. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exercise To is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Operator Command Port

Displays the operator command port.

Line Switching Type

Displays the line switching type.

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type.

Availability State

Displays whether the MS Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min]

Allows to configure the Wait to Restore Time.

MSP Activation

Allows to select the protection switching function state.

176 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

18.2 Add 1:N MSP

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP...

Bitrate

Allows to set the bit rate level.

Protection Port

Allows to select a protection port, if applicable.

Working Ports:

This area lists the selected working ports and allows to configure them, as long as the
corresponding 1:N protection is not yet activated.

The Add... button opens the Add Working Ports window.

After a port is added, you can configure the port number and the Low or High priority.

The Delete button removes the selected port from the list.

The Apply button transfers the configured port(s).to the Protection Management list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 177
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

18.3 1:N MSP Extension

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol (with created 1:N MSP) in the port list ->
Subview... -> 1:N MSP -> Configuration... -> Extend...

Worker Section Number

Displays the worker section number.

Worker Priority

Allows to configure the worker priority.

Additional Working Port


Allows to configure an additional working port.

178 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

18.4 Add Working Ports

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a 155-Mbit/s interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add 1:N MSP... -> Add...

After a port is marked in the Possible Working Ports list, it can be moved to the Selected
Working Ports list using the ">>" button, or vice versa using the "<<" button.

The Apply button copies the selected ports(s) into the Working Ports list in the Add 1:N MSP
window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 179
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

18.5 Working STM-1 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> (n x) STM-1 ->
Subview...

This window shows the (n x) STM-1 or STM-4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their
context menus.

180 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

18.6 Working VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an 155-Mbit/s port symbol (with created 1:N MSP) -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the (n x) AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 181
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19 2F/4F-SPRING Protection

19.1 2F SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING ->
Configuration...

This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring).

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 183
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

East / West

Displays the assigned ports.

2F-SPRING Control:

Active Ring Section

Displays the ring section that is being used

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type.


Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous
equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of
Protection commands is not possible.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Ring Segmentation Mode

Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:


Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841

Availability State

Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

Activate / deactivate the MSP.

Configure Ring Topology

Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.

Squelch...

Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

184 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 185
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.2 2F-SPRING Extra Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
2F-SPRING X -> Configuration...

This window displays information about 2F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Two Fibre Shared Ring Extra).

186 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

East / West

Displays the assigned ports.

2F-SPRING Control:

Main Traffic Active Ring Section

Displays the ring section that is being used

Extra Traffic West Squelch State

Displays the extra traffic squelch state (West)

Extra Traffic East Squelch State

Displays the extra traffic squelch state (East)

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type.


Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous
equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of
Protection commands is not possible.
The Force commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Ring Segmentation Mode

Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:


Two Fibre Shared Ring ITU G841

Availability State

Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

Activate / deactivate the MSP.

Note: In case of a deactivated MSP, extra traffic is not available (squelched).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 187
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Configure Ring Topology

Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.

Squelch...

Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

188 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.3 4F SPRING Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 4F-SPRING protection) -> Subview... ->
4F-SPRING -> Configuration...

This window displays information about 4F SPRING features and allows you to configure
particular items.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 189
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Ring Architecture

Displays which protection switching mode is used (Four Fibre Shared Ring).

Working West / Protecting West / Working East / Protecting East

Displays the assigned ports.

4F-SPRING Control:

Active Ring Section East / Active Ring Section West

Displays the ring section that is being used

Protection Mode

Displays the changeover type.


Non-revertive = remains in protection even after the problem in the working line has
disappeared.

Operator Command West / Operator Command East

In this field, the priority of the protection switching can be set:

Clear requests the standard mode for normal operating conditions.


Force Clear aborts the WTR time.
Lockout prevents any protection switching. Note that interworking with some previous
equipment (e.g. SURPASS hiT7070 Release 2.1) with respect to particular Lockout of
Protection commands is not possible.
The Forced commands have a higher priority than the Manual commands. They request
immediate protection switching.
Exerciser is only an exercise request without causing any protection switching. It can be
used for testing the K1/K2 protocol.

Ring Segmentation Mode

Enable / disable the ring segmentation mode

K1/K2 Protocol Type

Displays the K1/K2 protocol type:


Four Fibre Shared Ring - ITU G.841

Availability State

Displays whether the Protection Function is available (unlocked) or not (locked).


The Locked state can be caused by De-activated MSP Activation.

Wait to Restore Time [1..12 min] (only sensitive, if Protection mode = revertive.)

Enter the wait to restore time.

MSP Activation

Activate / deactivate the MSP.

190 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Configure Ring Topology

Opens the 2F-/4F-SPRING Topology Configuration window.

Squelch...

Opens the 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration window.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 191
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.4 2F / 4F SPRING Topology Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with installed 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Configure Ring Topology

In this window, you can configure the ring nodes with a symbolized graphical view of the ring.

Note:

The node IDs must be configured clockwise. The East direction of one node ID must be
followed by the West direction of the successor node ID.

Number of ring nodes [3..16]

192 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Enter the number of the ring nodes.

In the graphical display, nodes that are not used are grayed out.

Own Node ID [0..15]

Enter your own node ID.

Ring Map

Select a node ID for each ring node. The node ID must be unique within the ring.

2F-SPRING Configuration

2F-SPRING Extra Configuration

4F-SPRING Configuration

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 193
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.5 2F / 4F SPRING Squelch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F/4F-SPRING protection -> Subview... -> 2F/4F-SPRING
-> Configuration... -> Squelch...

Squelch Event Report Control

Allows to enable / disable the squelch event report control.

Squelch State

Displays the Receive / Transmit West / East squelch states for each AU4.

Squelch Table

Allows to configure the Node IDs for each AU4 in Receive and Transmit directions.

194 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.6 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 8 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 195
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.7 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

196 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.8 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS2G5 port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview...
-> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 197
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.9 STM-16 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS2G5 symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ... -> 32x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

198 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.10 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, Prepared 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G symbol with prepared 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 32 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 199
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.11 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection-> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

200 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.12 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 2F-SPRING Extra

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFS10G port symbol (with created 2F-SPRING Extra protection) -> Subview... ->
64x AU4/VC4 -> Subview...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 201
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

19.13 STM-64 AU4/VC4 Selection, 4F-SPRING

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with created 4F SPRING protection -> Subview ...-> 128x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ...

This window shows the AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

202 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

20 Link Protection

20.1 Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow

{bmct 20051a.bmp}

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview...

This window shows the Main ISTM 4 and if applicable the ESM ISTM 4 traffic flow symbol and
gives access to their context menus.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 203
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

20.2 Extension Link Protection Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an LNQ622M port symbol (with installed link protection) -> Subview... -> I-LINK-
PROT -> Configuration...

Working

Displays the working card and port.

Protecting

Displays the protecting card and port

Extension Link Protection Control:

Active Link Section

Displays the active link section.

Operator Command

Allows to select a protection command to be performed.

204 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

20.3 Add Extension Link Protection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a 155-Mbit/s
interface card symbol -> Protection... -> Add Link Protection...

Main Shelf:

Working Port

Allows to select the working port.

Connected to Extension Shelf

Displays the connection status.

Protecting Port

Allows to select the protecting port.

Connected to Extension Shelf

Displays the connection status.

Extension Shelf:

SUBRACK

Allows to select the subrack.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 205
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Working Port

Displays the working port.

Protecting Port

Displays the protecting port.

206 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

20.4 ISTM 4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View port list, by using the context menu of an
LNQ622M port symbol with configured link protection -> Subview... -> Configuration

Supervision

With this field, the processing of some alarms of this object can be enabled or disabled.

If Automatic is selected, the supervision is disabled in case of no signal, to avoid alarms with
not used ports.

Port Monitoring State

Displays the enabled or disabled port monitoring state.

Received . . . Connection:

Port

Displays the port.

Identifier

Displays the identifier

Connection Identifier (only for LNQ622M card)

With this field, the connection identifier can be selected.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 207
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21 Concatenations

21.1 VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 209
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.2 Virtual 2x VC3 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v
-> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

210 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.3 Virtual 4x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, port list, by using the context menu of a
IFQGBE port symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 ->
[VC4] Subview ... -> VC4-4v -> Subview

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 211
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.4 Virtual 7x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFQGBE symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 32 x VC4 ->
VC4 Subview... -> VC4-7v -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

212 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.5 Virtual 16x VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-16v concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-16v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 213
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.6 Virtual 64x AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with according concatenation activated -> Subview ...-> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview ... -> VC4-64v -> Subview

This window shows the Virtual AU4/VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

214 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.7 Concatenated VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a
PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 or n x AU4/VC4 ->
(VC4) Subview ... -> VC4-nv or VC4-nc -> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to the configuration menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 215
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

In Case of Virtual Concatenation VC4-nv

VC4-nv Misc:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)

Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

In Case of Contiguous Concatenation VC4-nc

VC4-nc Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms] (if applicable)

Waiting time after an alarm, before path protection switching.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received
errored blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No.
of Errored Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD
alarm (Signal Degrade alarm).

Concatenation Type

Displays the selected type of contiguous concatenation.

VC4-nc Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted (in case of structured VC4), expected and received TTI are
displayed.

216 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM
signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled:

Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of AIS.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 217
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII


characters within the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the
required subset of characters according to G831. Any remaining characters (which
are not typed by the operator) are automatically filled in with binary zero values. The
1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7 checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

218 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.8 VC12-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration...
-> VC4 Mux Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.

Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview...

VC12-2v Misc:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

Path Protection Hold-Off Time [0..200 x 100 ms]

Allows to enter the path protection hold-off time.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 219
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.9 VC3-2v Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by the context menu of a
PF2G5 card symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> n x VC4 -> VC4 Subview
...-> VC4 (Mux) -> Subview... -> VC3-2v -> Configuration...

This window shows the concatenation type and gives access to supervision configuration.

VC3-2v Misc:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

220 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.10 Concatenation Configuration

The windows are accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu
of an
ETH cards and SF2G5/SF10G:
Card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

SDH cards:
Port symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

This window allows you to select templates for concatenation groups.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 221
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Note:

With the PF2G5, IFOFE, IFOFE-E, IFQGBE, IFQGBEB, IFQGBEB-E and IFQGBE-E cards,
the user must select a template (see below).
For LO switching fabric SF10G/SF2G5 and IFOFES-E, the user has to configure first the VC4
multiplex structure. Otherwise only VC3 concatenations are possible.

IFOFES-E:
(via the context menu of the IFOFES-E card) Configuration -> VC4 Configuration -> 2x VC4
-> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation). The default configuration is VC3 with both VC4s of the IFOFES-E card.
A VC12-nv can only consist of VC12 containers that originate from the same VC4.
With VC3-2v, both VC3 containers must originate from the same VC4.

SF2G5/SF10G:
(via the context menu of the SF2G5/SF10G card) -> Subview... -> nx VC4 selection window
-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux Preparation). The
default configuration is VC3 with all VC4s.

If an entry in the list is selected, the Details... button opens the Concatenation Details
window.

The Add... button (if offered) opens the Add Concatenation Group window.

The Delete button (if offered) deletes the selected entry.

The Modify LCAS... button (if offered) opens the Modify LCAS Concatenation Group window.

The Template... button (if offered) opens the Concatenation Group Templates selection
window.

The Modify Template (if offered) button allows a member shift between two neighboured
VC4-nv groups.

The Delete Template... button (if offered) deletes all concatenation groups.

Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).

The following templates are available:

For the PF2G5 card:

Template 1 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 1xVC4-3v)

Template 2 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-4v)

Template 3 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 1xVC4-2v)

Template 4 (3xVC3, 3xVC3-2v, 3xVC4, 1xVC4-4v)

222 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

For the IFOFE / IFOFE-E card:

Template 5 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4)

Template 6 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4-5v, 1xVC4-4v)

Template 7 (6xVC3, 6xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)

Template 8 (8xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)

Template 9 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 4xVC4, 2xVC4-4v)

Template 10 (8xVC3, 2xVC3-2v, 3xVC4-4v)

Template 16 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4-6v)

For the IFQGBE / IFQGBEB card and the IFQGBE-E / IFQGBEB-E card:

Template 11 (4xVC4, 4xVC4-7v)

Template 12 (2xVC4, 4xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)

Template 13 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 6xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)

Template 14 (4xVC3, 4xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 3xVC4-4v, 2xVC4-7v)

Template 17 (4xVC4-8v)

Template 18 (14xVC3, 14xVC3-2v, 2xVC4, 2xVC4-8v)

Template 19 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 3xVC4-8v)

Template 20 (7xVC3, 7xVC3-2v, 1xVC4, 2xVC4-4v, 1xVC4-8v)

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 223
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.11 Concatenation Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a packet switch card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation..., select via Template button
a template -> Apply; select a line from the list and press the Details button

This windows displays details about the selected concatenation group.

224 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.12 Add Concatenation Group

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add...

Concatenation Type

Select the required type from the list.

Group ID

Enter the group ID. It depends on the card type.

Available TPs / Selected TPs

Select the required TPs and click >> to move them into the Selected TPs list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 225
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.13 Concatenation Group Templates

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Template...

This window offers some proven concatenation group templates to ease the configuration.

Note: You can select a template only if the card is not yet in service (i.e. no payload
transmitted, no cross connection created, no GFP group assigned to SDH signals).

Note: If a VC4-nv is to be generated, the selected template must contain two VC4-4v.

Note: For VLAN operation modes, only templates containing VC3 or VC3-2v should be
selected. High order VC´s (VC4 and VC4-nv) cannot be assigned to VLAN concentrators.

GFP Assignment

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

226 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

21.14 Modify Template

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFOFE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... (select an entry in the list) ->
Modify Template...

This window can be used to generate VC4-nv containers.

Note:

Only two VC4-4v can be changed in one template.

Two VC4-nv can be generated, but the sum must always be eight VC4s.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 227
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

22 VLAN

22.1 VLAN Functionality

General remarks on VLAN functionality


VLAN functionality is supported by the IFQGBEB (optical) and IFQGBEB-E (electrical) cards.
These card types can be configured in 3 different modes.

1. Point to point mode (P2P)


All 4 ETH ports working P2P like IFQGBE /-E cards.

2. VLAN C mode
Cards are running with 2 independent VLAN Concentrators:
VLAN C1 on gigabit ETH port #1
VLAN C2 on gigabit ETH port #3

ETH ports #2 and #4 are switched OFF in this mode.

There is a fixed relation between Concentrator -- GFP Group -- VC as follows:


ETH port #1 - VLAN C1 -- GFP group #1 - #8 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 1-16.
ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9 - #16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32.

3. Mixed Mode
Cards are running with 2 ports point to point (P2P) mode and one port with VLAN
concentrator functionality as follows:
ETH port #1 and #2 - P2P mode -- GFP group #1 or #2 -- AU channels of range 1-16
ETH port #3 - VLAN C2 -- GFP group #9-16 -- 8x AU4 channels of range 17-32
ETH port #4 - switched OFF

Change between the 3 different modes requires a deconfiguration of the already applied
card configuration.

Uplink and Downlink functionality

On VLAN modes it is distinguished between uplink and downlink.

Uplink is related to the gigabit ports ETH #1 and #3 of IFQGBEB /-E, that the concentrators
C1 and C2 are internally connected to.

Downlink is related to the VCs, that they can be assigned to the concentrators GFPs.

These VCs carrying ethernet frames through GFP encapsulation can be crossconnected via
the SDH network to the so called downlink port on other ethernet cards.

Basic functionality of the concentrators from downlink VCs to uplink port (upstream
direction):

• Receiving ethernet frames on assigned VCs with GFP encapsulation

• Determination of VLAN ID for received frame according to user defined table (Add VLAN
ID Assignment)

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 229
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

• Decapsulating ethernet frame (removal of GFP header)

• Inserting of VLAN Tag in ethernet frame

• Sending out tagged frame on gigabit uplink

• Processing of up to 8 GFP groups

• Processing of up to 8 subchannels per GFP group

Basic functionality of the concentrators from uplink port to downlink VCs (downstream
direction):

• Receiving of VLAN tagged frame on gigabit uplink port

• CRC and VLAN tag present check

• Determination of downlink VC - GFP channel for received tagged ethernet frame


according to user derfined table (Add VLAN ID Assignment)

• Removal of VLAN tag

• Removal of ETH frames with not determined VLAN tag

• Encapsulating of ethernet frame into GFP frames

• Mapping GFP encapsulated ethernet frame in assigned downlink VC

Note: On the downlink VC, only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned.


Regarding the Concatination Config for VLAN modes its therefore recommended to use
template 18 in case of VLAN C mode and template 19 or 20 in case of Mixed mode.

Tag interpretation in VLAN modes

VLAN Tag format accoding to 802.1q:

Type Field

• Ethertype 0x8100 will be inserted in upstream direction and is expected for tagged
frames received on gigabit uplink port towards downstream

Priority Field

• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)

• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)

CFI Field

• not interpreted in downstream direction (untagging)

230 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

• set to zero in inserted VLAN tag in upstream direction (tagging)

VLAN ID

• 1 ... 4094 freely configurable

Stacked VLANs or VLAN tunneling is supported, but there is no support for structured VLANs
(i.e. 4095x4095 VLAN IDs for interpreting two subsequent VLAN headers in one Frame).

Downstream VLAN tagged frames received on the gigabit uplink port which are shorter than
68 bytes (64 ... 67 Bytes including VLAN tag) will be extended to 64 byte length again after
the removal of the VLAN tag in the concentrator (padding). This extension is done by adding
a maximum of 4 bytes at the end of the frame before the FCS bytes.

Mutual influence of downstream speeds through flowcontrol on gigabit upstream port

Ports of IFQGBEB and IFQGBEB-E cards belonging to a VLAN concentrator domain do not
support admission control like IFQGBE and IFQGBE-E and the Point to Point (P2P) mode of
VLAN cards do. This means that an incoming VLAN stream on the gigabit uplink port
assigned to a downstream capacity of VC3 or VC3-2v cannot be limited by means of
admission control. Therefore care has to be taken at the device connected to the gigabit
upstream port, to not overrun the assigned downstream VCs. This goal can be reached
through limiting the data rate of such a stream on the router / server site according to the
assigned downstream VC capacity.

If a downstream VC is overrunned, two scenarios have to be considered:

• Asymmetric Flow Control is enabled on the gigabit uplink port.


MAC control frames (Pause) will be send out on the gigabit port. Since pause frames
cannot be classified all the VLAN streams of the device connected to the gigabit uplink
port will be slowed down to the speed of the overrunned downstream VC.

• Asymmetric Flow Control is disabled on the gigabit uplink port.


Frames in downstream direction will be discarded in case the assigned downstream VC
capacity is exceeded.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 231
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

22.2 VLAN C Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview...

This window shows the VLAN C traffic flow and gives an overview of the assigned VCs to
GFP relation. Context menues of the ETH port (ETH Configuration), VLAN C IDs (Assigned
VLAN IDs Information), GFP groups (GFP Frames Performance) and assigned VCs (VC4
Selection with PF2G5 or ETH Cards) can be directly accessed from here. The dotted line
between GFP group and VC symbol indicates that for this GFP group no VC assignment has
yet been done. The GFP groups are fixed assigned to the VLAN concentrator -> no dotted
line. Each VLAN concentrator has a separate traffic flow window.

Note for VLAN operation:

The VLAN functionality only makes sense if more than one stream/VLAN are used. For these
point-to-multipoint applications QoS provided by an external (egress) traffic shaper at the
uplink port is mandatory. Therefore the L2 service multiplexer function requires external (i.e.
BRAS, Router) traffic shaping. This means it is absolutely MANDATORY that for the VLAN
concentrator application egress traffic shaping per VLAN including max. burst size is
implemented in the uplink device (i.e. a BRAS in case of the DSL-scenario). This will avoid
head-of-line blocking in case of multiple VLAN-streams sharing the common GbE interface.

If this is not done, then an overflow of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer as well as
the egress buffers of a receiving FE card may happen. By this packet loss will not be
avoidable (depending on the situation):

232 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE VLAN card is disabled and the
connected BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. The reasons
for this frame drop are FIFO overflows of the sending GbE VLAN card's ingress buffer
as well as the receiving FE card's egress buffer.

• Packet loss may happen if flow control on the GbE card is enabled and the connected
BRAS does not implement the rate shaping on its egress side. Here only overflows of
the receiving FE card's egress buffer may happen. Nevertheless the enabled flow
control has influence on all eight GbE VLAN ingress buffers (one buffer for each of the
possible 8 downlink ports): If for one VLAN queue the ingress buffer overflows, the
activated pause frame mechanism will stop all other queues as well (i.e. also the
incoming frames to be sent in other FIFOs).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 233
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

22.3 VLAN Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add... -> Apply -> Close.
In the VLAN C #n Traffic Flow window select VLAN C #n -> Subview

This window shows all assigned VLAN IDs per VLAN concentrator. It gives access to the
VLAN communication alarm and copy function of the alarm setting onto other VLAN IDs.

234 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

22.4 VLAN C Mode GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VC structure has to be generated by means of the templates in the
Concatenation Group Templates window.

On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 and
VC4-nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!

The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.

Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.

On VLAN C mode GFP group #1- #8 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 1 on ETH
uplink port #1.

GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN Concentrator 2 on ETH uplink port #3.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 235
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

On VLAN uplink port #1 (GFP group #1 - #8) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be
assigned.

On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.

If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

In VLAN C mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #1 or #3
(uplink direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and
mapping frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.

Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or P2P mode.

Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #1 or #3) in downstream direction to
not overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of
the VC.

The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

VLAN ID Assignment...

Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

VLAN C ETH Config...

Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

236 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 237
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

22.5 Mixed Mode GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State: Mixed -> Apply -> Close -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

VLAN C-GFP Assignment

On VLAN mixed mode GFP group #9 - #16 are fixed assigned to VLAN concentrator 2 on
ETH uplink port #3.

ETH-GFP Assignment

Here ETH ports #1 and #2 running in standard point to point mode can be configured.

Assign ETH ports #1 and #2 to the GFP group #1 or #2 and enter the bandwidth for each
ETH port.

The value range is configurable : 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Note:

The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.

All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.

238 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.
Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.

Assignment point to point mode GFP groups #1 and #2


On GFP Group #1 and #2 VCs of AU4 channels 1 - 16 can be assigned.

The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains both 2 point to point mode ports (ETH
#1 and #2).

Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.

Assignment VLAN C2 - GFP Groups #9 - #16:

On VLAN concentrators only VC3 or VC3-2v can be assigned. High order VC’s (VC4 & VC4-
nv) can not be assigned to VLAN concentrators.

On VLAN uplink port #3 (GFP group #9 - #16) VC3 or VC3-2v of AU4 channels 17 - 32 can
be assigned.

The subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.

If subchannelling is enabled each GFP subchannel will be tagged in upstream direction with
its respective VLAN ID as configured in the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

In VLAN C Mode with 8 GFP groups per concentrator and a maximum of 8 VC subchannels
per GFP group, up to 64 (8x8) downlinkports can be assigned to one VLAN concentrator.
These downlinkports are VLAN tagged and multiplexed on the gigabit uplink port #3 (uplink
direction). In the down link direction the same principle applies with untagging and mapping
frames on the max. 64 downstream VCs.

Note: In VLAN concentrator admission control (bandwidth limitation) can not be configured as
in IFQGBE /-E cards or point to point mode.
Therefore care has to be taken on the gigabit uplink (port #3) in downstream direction to not
overrun the downstream VC capacity or the speed of the downlink port on the other end of the
VC.

Equal for all GFP Groups:

The supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

Note:

If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.
This alarm also raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 239
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption (in all
VLAN & point to point GFPs)!

VLAN ID Assignment...

Opens the Assigned VLAN IDs Information window.

VLAN C ETH Config...

Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

ETH Config...

Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

240 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

22.6 Assigned VLAN IDs Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids...

This window displays information about assigned VLAN Ids. Each VLAN concentrator has a
separate window, showing the assigned IDs.

The Add... button opens the Add VLAN ID Assignment window, to assign new VLAN IDs.

With the Delete button, a selected VLAN ID from the list can be deleted.

Note: Deleting a VLAN ID stops traffic in UP- and downstream direction through the
concentrator for the before assigned GFP channel.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 241
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

22.7 Add VLAN ID Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> VLAN
C #n -> Assigned VLAN Ids... -> Add...

In this window, make the necessary VLAN assignment settings.


Each VLAN concentrator has a separate window for VLAN ID assignments.

With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.

First choose the GFP group and GFP channel in that your signal is running and then set the
desired VLAN ID for that stream.

If subchanneling is enabled for the respective GFP group (in GFP Assignment window) GFP
channel 0...7 are available to assign to a VLAN ID.
In case subchanneling was disabled (in GFP Assignment window) the GFP channel line is
grayed out. (The dim visable `0´ is a default that can be ignored.)
Once a VLAN ID has been assigned to a GFP group/channel without subchanneling this
group will no longer be available in the GFP group line for selection.

VLAN IDs can be assigned to a GFP group/channel without having assigned a VC3 or VC3-
2v to that group before.

With the VLAN ID assignment the correlation between the VLAN tagged streams on the
gigabit uplink port and the VC downstream channels is done.

VLAN IDs can be freely selected in the area of 1...4094.


VLAN ID 0 and 4095 are reserved as stated in 802.1Q and can therefore not be assigned.

VLAN Functionality

242 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

23 Virtual VCs

23.1 Virtual 2x AU4/VC4 Selection

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of a IFS10G symbol with VC4-nv concatenation activated -> Subview... -> 64 x AU4/VC4 ->
Subview... -> VC4-2v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the Virtual VC4 traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context
menus.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 243
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

23.2 Virtual VC12 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a SF2G5 card
symbol -> Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration... -> VC4 Mux
Preparation.
Activate the necessary TUG #n checkbox(es). Click Apply.
Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... ->
Concatenation Type = VC12-nv -> Apply.

Return to the SF2G5 card symbol -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC12-nv ->
Subview... -> Virtual VC12 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC12 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

244 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of the
IFOFES-E cards.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...2000]

The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (BIP2).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label: (only IFOFES-E cards)

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Virtual VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (only IFOFES-E cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions

For SF2G5/SF10G cards:


Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 245
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

For IFOFES-E cards:


Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

246 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

23.3 Virtual VC3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of an SF2G5
symbol with activated concatenation -> Subview ...-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview ... -> VC3-2v
-> Subview... -> Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC3 Misc tab:

Supervision

Supervision of the VC3 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects of ETH
cards.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1.. 8000]

The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 247
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2..10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Virtual VC3 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal..

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions

For SF2G5/SF10G cards:


Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

248 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

For ETH cards:


Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

Virtual VC4 Configuration

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 249
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

23.4 Virtual AU4/VC4 Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFQ622M card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation... -> Add... -> Concatenation
Type = VC4-4v... -> Apply.
Return to the Port List symbol -> Subview... -> 4x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> VC4-4v ->
Subview -> Virtual AU4/VC4 #n -> Configuration...

Virtual VC4 Misc tab:

Supervision (if available)

Supervision of the VC4 signals is active, if checkbox is set.

RDI/REI Insertion (if available)

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows how many received blocks per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of Errored
Blocks (B3).

250 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label: (only at vcTtp objects of ETH cards)

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC4 signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected signal label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

Virtual VC4 Trail Trace tab:

The Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three types
transmitted (in case of vcTtp objects of ETH cards), expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

Only for a terminated structured VC4, the transmitted TTI can be inserted in the STM signal.

There are two modes:

Enabled: received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of
received TTI is not equal with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an
ASCII text.

Disabled: received TTI is monitored but in case of TIM, no TIM alarm will raise.

TIM Consequent Actions

For SDH cards:


Enabled:
TIM will be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will suppress alarms RDI or SD if two alarms at the same time.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM alarm will not be used for SNCP switching criteria.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

For ETH cards:


Enabled:
TIM will cause a traffic interruption with insertion of remote.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 251
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

There is no influence for RDI/REI insertion.


There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SDI, if two alarms at the same time occur.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn’t continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

Virtual VC3 Configuration

252 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24 GFP Configurations

24.1 GFP Group Traffic Flow

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an PF2G5 symbol in the port list -> Subview...

This window shows the GFP traffic flow symbols and gives access to their context menus.

Note:

Dashed lines symbolize connections that are not yet assigned, but shown here to clarify
coherences.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 253
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.2 GFP Group Subview

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an Ethernet card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Group Subview...

This window shows the GFP groups and gives access to their context menus.

254 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.3 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBE-E card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

Note:

If a received VC indicates to carry GFP framed traffic (signal label) and this is the expected
signal label (no PLM detected), but no packets can be delineated from this VC, a LofDel
alarm is raised.

ETH-GFP Assignment

Through this table, an Ethernet port is assigned to a GFP group which can consist of one or
more GFP channels. Subchanneling is implemented if several Ethernetports are assigned to
a single GFP group.

Assign ETH ports to the GFP groups (if provided) and enter the Bandwidth for each ETH port.

The value range depends on the port type:

Fast Ethernet 10Base-TX: 1...10 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Fast Ethernet 100Base-TX: 1...100 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Gigabit Ethernet 1000Base-SX/LX: 1...1000 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

Notes:

The IFOFES-E card does not support admission control (bandwidth limitation). This can be
done by adding or removing VC12 containers of a virtual concatenation group (2 Mbit/s
granularity).

The sum of the bandwidths of all ports assigned to one GFP group must not exceed the
capacity of the assigned Virtual Container (VC).
Approx. values: VC3: 50 Mbit/s, VC3-2v: 100 Mbit/s, VC4: 155 Mbit/s, VC4-4v: 622 Mbit/s,
VC4-7v: 1000 Mbit/s.

All frames will be dropped, if the channel numbers of sink and source are different.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 255
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.

Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!

The Subchannelling column determines if the GFP frame will have an extension header. An
extension header is required if the GFP group contains at least 2 ports.

The IFOFES-E card does not support subchanneling (extension header). Therefore the user
must pay attention that the incoming VC/VC group does not have an extension header,
otherwise all ETH frames will be dropped.

Note: Sink and source must have the same configuration, otherwise all frames will be
dropped.

The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

This alarm is raised if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

ETH Config...

Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

PF2G5 GFP Assignment

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

256 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.4 PF2G5 GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment...

LP Bandwidth Configuration

Enter the Ingress Bandwidth and Egress Bandwidth for each LP port.

Value range: 1...450 Mbit/s in 1-Mbit/s steps.

GFP-SDH Assignment

Assign the VC or VC group to each GFP group and enable/disable supervision.

RPR-SDH Assignment

Select Quad or Single SDH Capacity and assign the VC or VC group to the RPR and
enable/disable supervision.

Port Config...

Opens the PF2G5 Config window, after selecting a port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration
table.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Selection window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 257
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Create / Delete VC Channels

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

How to Configure RPR Bandwidths

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

258 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.5 PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select a port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Single CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG
Management

CUG ID [0..4095]

Select the CUG ID.

Service Class

Select the Service Class.

Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.

Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.

Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450]

Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.

VLAN Mode

Select the VLAN mode.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 259
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.6 PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi1 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

The table allows to enter the Multi1 CUG configuration settings according to the network
planning.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

260 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.7 PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode) -> Apply -> CUG Management

Tunnel Tag Prot ID

Enter the Tunnel Tag Prot ID

The table allows to enter the Multi2 CUG configuration settings according to the network
planning.

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

How to Specify the CUG Service Class

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 261
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.8 PF2G5 Add CUG

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment... (select an port in the LP Bandwidth
Configuration table) -> Port Config... (select Multi2 CUG Mode, move at least 1 entry from the
"Possible CUG ID values" list to the "CUG ID list") -> Apply -> CUG Management -> Add
CUG

CUG ID [1..4095]

Select the CUG ID.

Tunneling Mode

Activate / Deactivate the tunneling mode.

Service Class

Select the Select Class.

Ingress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]

Select the Ingress Stream Bandwidth.

Egress Stream Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]

Select the Egress Stream Bandwidth.

Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth [1..450 Mbps]

Select the Ingress Best Effort Bandwidth.

PF2G5 Single CUG Management Configuration

262 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

PF2G5 Multi1 CUG Management Configuration

PF2G5 Multi2 CUG Management Configuration

How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 263
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

24.9 SDH GFP Assignment

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Cross Connections -> Plain List...
(e.g. using a cross connection of an IFOFGE-E card, by selecting an entry in the list) -> GFP
Assignment...

GFP-SDH Assignment

Note: First, the VCs have to be generated by means of the templates in the Concatenation
Group Templates window.

Now all VCs of the selected template are available and can be assigned to GFP groups.

Be aware that assignment/reassignment of VC to GFP will cause traffic interruption!

The VC/VC Group column allows to select a VC.

The Supervision column enables/disables the supervision for the GFP alarm LOFDEL.

This alarm raises if the received VC does not contain GFP frames.

ETH Config...

Opens the card-specific ETH Configuration window.

GFP Group Subview...

Opens the GFP Group Subview window.

264 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

VC4 Subview...

Opens the VC4 Selection window.

How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 265
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25 LCAS

25.1 LCAS State Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Configuration -> LCAS State...

This window shows the LCAS state of all LCAS virtual groups in the network element. With
filters, the operator can select special groups.

Filter:

The Termination Point list can be filtered by setting filter options.

Selected Item:

Sink

Displays the sink state.

Source

Displays the source state.

LCAS Source Direction State

Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 267
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = The LCAS protocol is not activated
active = the LCAS protocol is activated
failed = failure in the signal

268 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25.2 Modify LCAS Concatenation Group

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFOFES-E card with VC3 or VC12 LCAS concatenation -> Configuration -> Concatenation
(with an entry in the list selected) -> Modify LCAS...

This window allows to select the number of members in the concatenation and to select the
associated TPs from the list of available TPs.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 269
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25.3 LCAS VC3-nv Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Configuration...

LCAS VC3-1v Misc:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps

Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.

LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold

Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.

Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC3-2v (2x 48 Mbit = 96 Mbit) and the threshold is set
to 90, then an alarm rises, when 1 VC3 is turned out.

270 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25.4 LCAS VC12-nv Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in the upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview...
-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Configuration -> TP...

LCAS VC12-1v Misc:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision for this LCAS group alarms. This supervision has no
influence to the alarms of the included VCs.

Concatenation Type

Displays the concatenation type.

Configured LCAS Group Capacity/Mbps

Displays the Configured LCAS Group Capacity.

LCAS: Partial Loss Threshold

Allows to set separate thresholds in case of partial loss of received / transmitted capacity.

Partial Loss of Capacity: You can allow a minimum capacity (Mbit/s) by configuration, which
an LCAS group can have. If there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is
set to 7, then an alarm rises, when 2 VC12 are turned out.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 271
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25.5 LCAS VC3-nv Virtual VC3 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview...

This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC3 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).

272 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25.6 LCAS VC12-nv Virtual VC12 Selection

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview...
-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ...

This window shows the LCAS Virtual VC12 traffic flow symbol(s) and gives access to the
context menu(s).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 273
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25.7 LCAS Virtual VC3 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol (with LCAS virtual VC3 concatenation) -> Subview... -> 2x
VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS VC3-1v #n -> Subview... ->
LCAS Virtual VC3 #n -> Configuration...

LCAS VC3 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI.

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...8000]

The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

274 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (B3).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label:

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

LCAS State:

Sink

Displays the sink state.

Source

Displays the source state.

LCAS Source Direction State


Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

LCAS VC3 Trail Trace tab:

The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

There are two modes:

Enabled:

Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will switch off this VC, the VC group capacity will be reduced by this VC.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 275
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

276 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

25.8 LCAS Virtual VC12 Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of an IFOFES-E port symbol -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux)
#n -> Subview... -> VC4 -> Configuration -> VC4 Mux Preparation tab -> TUG-3 #n: activate
the 21 x TU-12 checkbox -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES-E card symbol in tne upper part of the Module View -> Configuration ->
Concatenation... -> Add... -> LCAS VC12-nv -> configure the TPs -> Apply.
Return to the IFOFES port symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 2x VC4 -> VC4 Subview...
-> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview... -> LCAS #n -> Subview ... -> LCAS Virtual VC12 #n ->
Configuration...

LCAS VC12 Misc tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision of this VC.

RDI/REI Insertion

The RDI/REI Insertion allows enable/disable the RDI/REI insertion at vcTtp objects.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 277
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

No. of Errored Blocks for a Bad Second [1...2000]

The entry shows, how many blocks received per second are allowed to be bad.

Note: If SD is raised, there is a hysteresis for clear SD, in this case the received errored
blocks, to declare a bad second, must not exceed 10 % of the configured No. of
Errored Blocks (BIP2).

No. of Consecutive Bad/Good Seconds for SD [2...10]

Specifies how many consecutive bad seconds must occur to trigger or clear the SD alarm
(Signal Degrade alarm).

Signal Label:

Transmitted

The value is set in accordance to the contents of the VC signal. You can find all used signal
labels by scrolling through the whole number range.

For GFP mapping, the signal label = 13.

Expected

Expected Signal Label in the received VC can be set. You can find all used signal labels by
scrolling through the whole number range.

Received

Actual value of the signal label in the received VC.

LCAS State:

Sink

Displays the sink state, i.e. the state of the incoming single VC.

Source

Displays the source state, i.e. the state of the outgoing single VC, as received by the remote
station.

Note: In order to have LCAS traffic, at least one of the source members must be set to
"Active".

LCAS Source Direction State

Allows to set the LCAS source direction state.

To increase the group capacity, this VC can be added by setting it to Active. This increases
the capacity in outgoing direction.

Note:
One member of a LCAS group could have three states:
idle = the LCAS protocol is not activated
active = the LCAS protocol is activated
failed = failure in the VC12

278 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

LCAS VC12 Trail Trace tab:

The LCAS Trail Trace tab is used to display and configure the trail trace identifier. The three
types transmitted, expected and received TTI are displayed.

TTI Processing

There are two modes:

Enabled:

Received TTI (Path trace) is supervised and the TIM alarm will raise in case of received TTI is
not equal
with the expected TTI or the received trace is not an ASCII text.

Disabled:

Received TTI is monitored but not supervised on TIM alarm.

TIM Consequent Actions

Enabled:
TIM will cause an interruption of this single VC and will reduce the group capacity.
TIM will suppress the alarms RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.
There is no influence to PM counters.

Disabled:
TIM will not interrupt the traffic or reduce the group capacity.
TIM will not suppress RDI or SD, if two alarms at the same time occur.
TIM will cause RDI insertion.

Transmitted / Expected

ASCII: The configurable character string of the AP ID consists of 7-bit ASCII characters within
the range 20h to 7Eh (32DEC to 126DEC). This includes the required subset of characters
according to G831. Any remaining characters (which are not typed by the operator) are
automatically filled in with binary zero values. The 1st byte HEX field contains the CRC-7
checksum with frame alignment bit.

Received

The received string isn't continually updated. It is necessary to use the update button.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 279
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

26 MCF General

26.1 Message Communication Functions

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF...

This window contains functional symbols representing the different layers for message
communication. The symbols are used to select the components of the MCF.

Context Menu:

In the View, right-click the symbol to open the respective context menu.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 281
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

26.2 MCF Stack Parameters Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack Parameters -> Configuration...

Notes:

When stack parameters are changed, the stack restarts. Connection to NE has to be
reestablished.

Layer 4 (Transport):

Window Timer [5..1009]/10s

The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite
station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.

Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]

Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement for this
packet from the opposite station.

282 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]

Specifies the time after the data packet is repeated if no acknowledgement for this packet by
the opposite station was received.

Layer 3 (NSAP):

Area Address

The address range forms part of the NSAP address (area, system ID, and selector) and is
mainly defined by the first byte of the NSAP address. That first byte, called AFI, defines the
length and the byte rate from all three parts. The NSAP address has to be fixed by the DCN
planning.

Note:

The NSAP address has to be unique.

System ID

The System ID is 6 Bytes long.

Note:

The System ID as part of the NSAP address has to be planned by the DCN planning team.

NSAP Selector [1.255]

The NSAP Selector is a part of the own NSAP address.

Note:

The NSAP selector has to be "01"!

Layer 3 (CLNS):

CLNS Maximum Lifetime [2..255]

Displays the maximum lifetime of a CLNS PDU in steps of 0.5 seconds. If a CLNS PDU is
forwarded by an intermediate system, the lifetime of this PDU is always decremented by at
least 0.5 seconds.

Routing Principle

Displays if a system belongs to the OSI routing backbone (L2) or to an single OSI area only
(L1).

Note:

The configuration is only accessible to user level 4. A change of configuration could be


followed by a loss of connection.

How to Configure NSAP Settings

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 283
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

26.3 MCF Transport Connection Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Information...

In this window, the performance information of a connection to a remote NE is displayed.

Remote NSAP Address

Displays the NSAP Address of the connected LCT/NCT/OS.

Remote T Selector

T Selector used by the remote manager for this transport connection.

Local T Selector

T Selector used by this NE for this transport connection.

Connection Type

Direction of the transport connection setup. (Outgoing = sent from the local system, Incoming
= sent from the remote system).

Window Timer [5..1009]/10s

The Window timer specifies the maximum time between windows updates used for this
connection. The window timer therefore is used to send AK TPDU when there is no activity on
the transport connection, in order to avoid a premature disconnection by the peer entity. This
parameter also controls the inactivity timer. If no acknowledgement PDUs from the opposite

284 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

station are received for a time computed as the product of the Window Timer and the
Maximum No. of Transmissions, Layer 4 quits the connection.

Maximum No. of Transmissions [3..16]

Displays, how often a data packet (Acknowledge) has to be repeated.

Retransmission Time [250..64000 ms]

Displays the time after the data packet is repeated if there was no acknowledgement from the
opposite station.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 285
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

26.4 MCF Transport Connection Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Transport Connections n -> Performance...

This window displays how many bytes were received and sent and how many Packet Data
Units (PDUs) where received, sent and repeated.

286 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

27 MCF CLNS

27.1 MCF CLNS Dynamic Routing Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Information...

This window displays information for network configuration for the local NE.

Destination Areas

Address Prefix
displays the address part of the destination area.

Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.

Adjacency Reference List Number


contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 287
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Destination Systems

NSAP Address
displays the NSAP of the destination system.

Path Cost
displays the cost summary from this area to the destination area.

Adjacency Reference List Number


contains the adjacency IDs usable for reaching the destination area.

Adjacencies
displays all adjacencies to neighbours via Ethernet or DCC.

Linkage ID (only in case of a DCC adjacency)


displays the internal ID number of the linkage.

Adjacency ID
displays the internal ID number of the adjacency.

Neighbour SNPA (only in case of an Ethernet adjacency)


displays the MAC address of the neighbour.

Neighbour System Type


displays the Level 2 or Level 1 system type.

Neighbour System IDs

Displays the System IDs of the neighbour.

288 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

27.2 MCF CLNS Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> CLNS -> Performance...

This window is used for displaying MCF CLNS performance information.

The counter values are displayed as: ddd.ddd.ddd.ddd (d means digit) to improve the
readability.

IS-IS Level 1 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 1 routing.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 289
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Display Meaning

Raised The level 1 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.

Cleared No overload

IS-IS Level 2 Data Base Overload

Displays the overload state of this linkage for level 2 routing.

Display Meaning

Raised The level 2 routing data base is overloaded; the routing through this system is
disturbed.

Cleared No overload

Assembling Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered due to
reassembly time expiry.

Congestion Discards

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded due to congestion.

Error Reports Received

Displays the number of error report PDUs received, which were addressed to this NE.

Area Addresses Ignored

Displays the number of the manual area addresses dropped from the NE’s area, because the
maximum number of area addresses inside the NE is reached.

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

290 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Other PDUs Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report PDUs discarded for any reason except
congestion.

Segments Discarded

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs discarded without being delivered for
any reason except reassembly time expiry.

Segments Received

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs received.

Segments Sent

Displays the number of data and error report NPDUs sent after segmentation processing
occurs.

Upload Dump DB...

Opens a standard Save window to store data base parameters in the DumpDB.log file.

Upload Config Parameters...

Opens a standard Save window to store configuration parameters in the


ConfigParameters.log file.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 291
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

28 MCF DCC

28.1 MCF DCC Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration...

In this window, you can create various connections between DCC channels and the VC-4
ports.

DCC List

The list contains 5 DCC channels and displays its connection state.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 293
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Display Meaning

OSI DCC Channel OSI DCC channel name

IP DCC Device IP DCC channel name

DCCM/DCCR Port <DCCM or DCCR type>_<slot number>.<port>

Connection State Possible values: DCCM; DCCR; free

Linkage State Possible values: Enabled / Disabled

New DCC Cross Connection

Set the type of DCC cross connection and select the MS/RS port from the Port List.

How to Configure DCC Cross Connections

Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections

294 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

28.2 MCF DCC Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

Fixed routes to other routing domains, called Reachable Address Prefixes, can be created
and deleted here.

Configuration:

Traffic Mode

Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.

External Domain

Possible settings: Yes or No

yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NE’s.

no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).

Level 1 Default Metric [1..63]

Cost for DCC channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 295
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]

Cost for DCC channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of
all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

T200 Time [200...2500 ms]

Value range: 200...2500 ms

Interface Type

Setting the interface for the local and remote NE. For a successful connection, the one NE
must be set on Network and the other one to User.

Line Code

Displays the NRZ line code.

MCF Linkage State

Displays, whether the connection can be used (enabled) or not (disabled).

Note:

In Active NE state, it may be necessary to click Apply after every single parameter change.

The Add... button opens the DCC Reachable Address Add window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the DCC Reachable Address
Modify window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.

296 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

28.3 MCF DCC Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate


memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of


this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Address Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Area Mismatch

If an adjacency cannot be initialized between two Level 1 ISs because of non-divisibility of a


common range address, the value of this Area Mismatch is increased.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 297
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

298 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

28.4 Adding a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration

Address Prefix

The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this DCC linkage" (Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)

- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 299
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

300 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

28.5 Modifying a Reachable DCC Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC -> Configuration... (by using the context
menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this DCC linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only mode."
(Hint: a DCC linkage never has a SNPA!)

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 301
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

28.6 Declaration of the Used Bytes for HCOC Connections

MSOH CPs in each Termination Point:

DCCM [combined CP for bytes (6,1,1), (6,4,1), (6,7,1), (7,1,1), (7,4,1), (7,7,1), (8,1,1), (8,4,1)
and (8,7,1)]

HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1) and (5,8,1)]


HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,5,1), (7,6,1) and (7,8,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1) and (8,3,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,5,1), (8,6,1) and (8,8,1)]
HCOC3 [combined CP for bytes (8,9,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]

HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1), (6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1), (7,2,1)
and (7,3,1)]
HCOC9 [combined CP for bytes (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1), (8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,8,1)
and (9,9,1)]

HCOC27 [combined CP for bytes (5,5,1), (5,6,1), (5,8,1), (5,9,1), (6,2,1), (6,3,1), (6,5,1),
(6,6,1), (6,8,1), (6,9,1),(7,2,1), (7,3,1), (7,5,1), (7,6,1), (7,8,1), (7,9,1), (8,2,1), (8,3,1), (8,5,1),
(8,6,1), (8,8,1), (8,9,1), (9,2,1), (9,3,1), (9,4,1), (9,8,1) and (9,9,1)]

MCF DCC Configuration

302 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

29 MCF Ethernet

29.1 MCF Ethernet Linkage Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.

SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry (SNPA = MAC address).

Click Delete to clear existing addresses.

Configuration:

Traffic Mode

Select the traffic mode according to the planning data.

External Domain

Possible settings: No or Yes

yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NE’s.

no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default).

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 303
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

L1/L2 Intermediate System Priority [1...127]

Priority of the system for being selected as the designated IS on the sub network.

Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]

Cost for Ethernet channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]

Cost for Ethernet channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the
metrics of all paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

MAC Ethernet Address

Displays the MAC address used by the NE for this Ethernet linkage". (Hint: the MAC address
is not configurable in the hiT70xx system).

MCF Linkage State

Linkage state is displayed.

The Add... button opens the Ethernet Reachable Address Add window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the Ethernet Reachable
Address Modify window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.

304 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

29.2 MCF Ethernet Linkage Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate


memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of


this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Addresses Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 305
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

306 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

29.3 Adding a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator.

- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 307
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.


If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry.

308 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

29.4 Modifying a Reachable Ethernet Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Ethernet -> Configuration... (by using the
context menu of a channel in the list) -> Configuration... -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using the SNPA address given as an additional information by the operator. In
the modify window, this is in a read only mode.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

SNPA Address

SNPA address of the reachable address entry. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 309
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

30 MCF OSI/IP

30.1 MCF IP over OSI Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / IP over OSI -> Configuration...

This window contains a checkbox for activating the tunneling and displays the Remote Tunnel
NSAP and the Assigned IP Pseudo Interface.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 311
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

30.2 MCF OSI over IP Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration...

Reachable Addresses

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)

Configuration:

Activate Tunnel

Setting the checkbox for tunnel activation.

External Domain

Possible settings: No or Yes

yes = IS-IS routing is switched off. In this case the creation of RAP’s thru this linkage is
strongly recommended; otherwise this linkage will not be used for communication to other
NE’s.

no = IS-IS routing is switched on (Default)."

Level 1 Default Metric [1--63]

Cost for channel for level 1 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

312 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

Level 2 Default Metric [1..63]

Cost for channel for level 2 routing. When routing from one NE to another, the metrics of all
paths are added and the path with the lowest cost is preferred.

Preference is always given to the highest cost (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default = 1

Source IP Address

This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.

Destination IP Address

This address has to be fixed by the planning personnel.

MCF Linkage State

Linkage state is displayed.

The Add... button opens the MCF OSI over IP Reachable Address Add window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Modify... button opens the MCF OSI over IP
Reachable Address Modify window.

After selecting an entry in the list, the Delete button removes the selected entry from the list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 313
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

30.3 MCF OSI over IP Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Performance...

Reject Adjacency

It is registered, if the information of an NE cannot be received because of an inadequate


memory capacity in the adjacent range.

Version Skew

If an adjacency cannot be initialized because of incompatible protocol versions, the value of


this version skew is increased.

ID Field Length Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this ID
Field Length Mismatch is increased.

Max. Area Address Mismatch

If a PDU is received with a wrong value for the length of the system ID, the value of this Max.
Area Address Mismatch is increased.

Octets Received

Displays the total number of received user data octets.

Octets Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data octets.

314 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Frames Received

Displays the total number of received user data frames.

Frames Sent

Displays the total number of sent user data frames.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 315
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

30.4 MCF OSI over IP, Adding a Reachable Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
Add...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the Add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration

Address Prefix

The Reachable Address Prefix is a L2 routing information for reaching destinations in another
routing domain. The Reachable Address Prefix is distributed throughout the whole DCN.

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage" (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a
SNPA!)

- A Reachable Address Prefix pointing towards its own area is not allowed.
- Within an NE, it is not allowed that a Reachable Address Prefix is a subset of
another one.

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

The metric type Internal should be preferred. An address prefix with metric type
Internal will be regarded in the routing and decision process. If an "internal" address
prefix fails, another one will be used, if possible.

316 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

If an "external" address prefix fails, no other one will be used, even if there may be
one.

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 317
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

30.5 MCF OSI over IP, Modifying a Reachable Address

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Tunneling / OSI over IP -> Configuration... ->
(with an entry selected in the Reachable Addresses list) -> Modify...

In this window, you can create a new entry in the reachable address list or modify an existing
one. When the add window is opened, the configuration items are filled with default values
(zero).

Configuration:

Address Prefix

Any system whose Network Address begins with the given prefix (1...20 byte, only full byte)
will be reached using this OSI over IP linkage. In the modify window, this is in a read only
mode." (Hint: a OSI over IP linkage never has a SNPA!)

Default Metric [1..63]

Path switching parameter for reaching the specified prefix. Preference is always given to the
highest level (1= very good; 63 = very bad).

Default Metric Type

Possible values: Internal or External

Setting this value to External is required e.g. for integration of heterogeneous networks (e.g.
different network providers).

318 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

31 IP Settings

31.1 IP Addresses Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses...

This window allows to configure the IP addresses for each DCN interface within the
SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column Description

Index Unique identifier of the interface.

This index must be used also for identification of unnumbered links in OSPF
configuration.

(Identifier = SNMP-index)

Interface Interface name.

Possible Interface names are :

eth0:
for Ethernet Interface
(unnumbered index 2)

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 319
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

lo:0:
for Local loopback interface
(unnumbered index 1)

dcc:
Point-to-point interface over DCCM or DCCR. Each device could be configured
as numbered or unnumbered interface

IP The local IP address of the interface.


Address
The default value for the interface is 0.0.0.0 in this case the interface is not
configured.

Once a local loopback address has been defined in the SURPASS hiT 7070, it
is not possible any more to reset a configured IP address back to 0.0.0.0. If the
address 0.0.0.0 is assigned, the NE assigns the address of lo:0 to this device. If
the IP address of an interface is equal to the address of the local loopback
interface lo:0 this interface is treated as unnumbered interface. If the IP address
is not equal to the address of lo:0 or to the address of any other interface this
interface is called a numbered interface. Every time that the operator tries to
disable an IP interface by configuring its IP address to 0.0.0.0, the local
loopback IP address will be set.

+ to disable IP on the interface set this interface to OSI only, using the "Linkage
Config" window.

For Ethernet interface: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF -> Ethernet ->
Configuration, then select OSI.

For DCC interfaces: SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF -> DCC, then
select a DCC interface and press the right-hand-mouse button, select
"Configuration", then select OSI.

Subnet Subnet mask associated with the IP address of this interface.


Mask
It defines the network that this interface belongs to. If OSPF is enabled on this
interface the subnet mask has to be the same as set for the connected peer
interface(s).

Dest IP The destination IP address of the interface referenced by the Index.


Address
For the Ethernet interface the destination has to be the same as the source. For
DCC links normally it is not necessary to enter any data in this field. The
destination address will be learned via PPP protocol.

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Addresses Entry Modify window.

320 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

31.2 IP Addresses Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP Addresses... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify a selected entry in the IP Addresses Config table.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 321
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

31.3 IP Static Routing Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing...

This window shows all the IP routes known by the SURPASS hiT 7070 and also allows to
configure static routes manually.

Each known route has one entry (row) in the table. For each known route the following
information is shown:

Column Description

Destination Destination IP address of this route.

Warning: The networks 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255 are reserved for


internal purposes and should never be entered in this table.

Interface Name of the local interface through which the next hop of this route should
be reached.

Metric Primary routing metric for this route.


[0..32766]

Next Hop IP address of the next hop of this route.

Type Type of the route:

Direct

322 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The destination IP address is directly connected to the SURPASS hiT 7070


via the interface named in the "interface" column.

Indirect
The destination IP address is reachable via the Next Hop IP address.

Invalid
removes the route from the active routing process.

Protocol Routing mechanism via which this route was learned.

Mask Mask to be logically AND-ed with the destination address, before being
compared to the value in the Destination field.

Add...

Opens the IP Static Routing Entry Add window.

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the IP Static Routing Entry Modify
window.

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

On deletion, the route will be first set to "Invalid" type.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 323
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

31.4 IP Static Routing Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the IP Static Routing Config table.

324 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

31.5 IP Static Routing Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP static Routing... -> Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the IP Static Routing Config table.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 325
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32 OSPF Settings

32.1 OSPF Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> OSPF...

This window allows to configure the OSPF routing in the SURPASS hiT 7070 (called "router"
from now on).

OSPF Router ID

Identifier of the router (SURPASS hiT 7070) in the Autonomous System. The initial value is
the IP Ethernet interface address of the router.

Enabled OSPF

The value Enabled (ticked on) means that OSPF is active. The value Disabled means that
OSPF is inactive on all interfaces.

Note: Clicking Enabled OSPF returns "enabled" only if the OSPF Router ID is set and if at
least one interface is configured with an area. In all other cases, "disabled" will be returned.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 327
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Autonomous System Border Router

Indication whether this router is an Autonomous System border router (ASBR). ASBRs
propagate default routes only when these are entered.

Area Border Router

Indication whether this router is an area border router.

Information Fields:

External Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements, which are currently
stored in the link-state database.

Originated New Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated by this
router.

Received New Link State Advertisements

Displays the number of link-state advertisements received, determined to be new


instantiations.

External LSA Checksum Summary

Displays the sum of the LSA checksums of the external link-state advertisements contained in
the link-state database.

328 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.2 OSPF Areas Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Areas handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070
("router"). For each area handled by the SURPASS hiT 7070 there is a row in this table.

Column Description

Area Unique identifier of an area.

LSA Import Import mode selection for LSAs (Link State Advertisements). Used
to configure stub areas.

SPF Runs The number of times that the intra-area route table has been
calculated using this area's link state database.

Link State This is an information field: displays the number of Link State
Advertisement (LSA) Advertisements.

LSA Checksum This is an information field: displays the sum of the LSA link-state
Summary checksums contained in the link-state database of this area.

Area Summary Control of the import of summary LSAs into stub areas.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 329
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Modify...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Areas Entry Modify window.

Note:

No entries can be added to this table, it is built by the SURPASS hiT 7070 based on the
OSPF areas known.

330 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.3 OSPF Areas Entry Modify

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Areas... ->
Modify...

This window allows to modify an existing entry in the OSPF Areas Config table.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 331
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.4 OSPF Area Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Metric.

332 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.5 OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Area Aggregates.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .

Column Description

Area Area in which the Area Aggregate is to be found.

LSDB Type Type of the Area Aggregate.

Net The IP address of the network or sub-network indicated by the range.


Address

Net Mask The sub-network mask that pertains to the network or sub-network.

Effect Sub-networks subsumed by ranges


either trigger the advertisement of the indicated aggregate (advertise
matching),
or result in the sub-network not being advertised at all outside the area.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 333
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Add...

Opens the OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add window.

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:

Configuration may cause a reboot on other SURPASS hiT 7070 / 7050 in the network.

334 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.6 OSPF Area Aggregates Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Area
Aggregates... -> Add..

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Area Aggregates Configuration table.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 335
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.7 OSPF Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF interfaces.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Interfaces Configuration window is the
OSPF Configuration

Column Description

Index Unique identifier of this interface.


This is the index defined in the IP Address Table.

IP Address IP address of this interface.

State OSPF interface state: possible types are

For Ethernet Interface:


Designated Router,
Backup Designated Router
Other Designated Router

For DCC Interfaces,


Point to Point (PtP)

Events Number of times this OSPF interface has changed its state, or
an error has occurred.

336 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Administrative State Status of OSPF for this interface (Enabled / Disabled).

Area Unique identifier of the area to which the interface connects.

Type OSPF interface type:

Broadcast (Ethernet interfaces).


Point-to-Point (DCC interfaces)

The Loopback interface reads "unknown" in this table.

Designated Router IP address of the designated router in the LAN, if applicable.

Backup Designated IP address of the backup designated router in the LAN, if


Router applicable.

Router Priority [0..255] Priority of this interface for becoming Designated Router.
Prio = "0" means excluded from becoming Designated Router.

Transit Delay [0..3600 s] Estimated number of seconds to transmit a link-state update


packet over this interface.

Retransmission Interval Number of seconds between link-state advertisement


[0..3600 s] retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.

Hello Interval [1..65535 Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router
s] sends on the interface.

Timeout [1..65535 s] Timeout interval.

Password Type Type of the password.

Password Password entry.

Add...

Opens the OSPF Interfaces Entry Add window

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:

No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 337
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.8 OSPF Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interfaces...
-> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF interfaces Config table.

Notes:

To add an unnumbered interface, select the index number of the interface defined in the IP
Address table. The interface will then be identified with the Loopback address. The IP
Address field is grayed out.

The IP address of the interface lo:0 and all unnumbered interface will only be advertised, if
OSPF is enabled on lo:0. The fields that are left blank in this window, will automatically be
configured to the default values:

338 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Area Backbone Area

Router Priority 1

Transit Delay 1

Retransmission Interval 5

Hello Interval 10

Timeout 40

Password none

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 339
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.9 OSPF Interface Metric Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Interface
Metric...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Interface Metric.

Column Description

IP Address IP address of this OSPF interface.

Index Unique identifier of the interface to which this


entry is applicable (see IP Address Table).

Metric Value [0..65535] Metric on this interface.

340 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.10 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces...

This window allows to configure the OSPF Virtual Interfaces.

Note:

A precondition for successful settings in the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Configuration window is
the OSPF Configuration .

Note:

If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link. No virtual interfaces
can be defined through areas with unnumbered links.

Column Description

Area Transit area that the Virtual Link traverses.

Virtual Neighbour Router ID of the Virtual Neighbour.

State OSPF virtual interface state.

Events Number of state changes or error events on this Virtual Link.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 341
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Transit Delay [0..3600 s] Estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link-state


update packet over this interface.

Retransmission Interval Number of seconds between link-state advertisement


[0..3600 s] retransmissions, for adjacencies belonging to this interface.

Hello Interval [1..65535 s] Number of seconds between the Hello packets that the router
sends on the interface.

Timeout Timeout interval. This timeout interval has to be longer than


[1.. 2147483647 s] 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Password Type Type of the password.

Password Password entry.

Add...

Opens the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add window.


Note:

Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values. The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.

The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s).

Delete

If an entry in the table is selected, this button deletes it from the list.

Note:
No entries can be modified in this table. If the operator wishes to do a modification, the
corresponding entry must be deleted and a new entry must be added.

342 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.11 OSPF Virtual Interfaces Entry Add

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Interfaces... -> Add...

This window allows to add a new entry to the OSPF Virtual Interfaces Config list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 343
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.12 OSPF Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF neighbours. For each known neighbour there
is one entry (row) in this table.

Column Description

IP Address IP address of this neighbour.

Index On an interface having an IP address: zero.

On unnumbered interfaces, the corresponding value of the Index


in the Internet Standard MIB.

Neighbour Router ID Unique identifier of the neighbour router in the Autonomous


System.

LSA Import LSA import state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service Routing Type-of-Service Routing state with this neighbour (OFF/ON).

Neighbour Priority Priority of this neighbour in the designated router selection


[0..255] algorithm.

State State of the relationship with this neighbour.

344 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Events Number of times this neighbour relationship has changed state,


or an error has occurred.

Retransmission Queue Current length of the retransmission queue.


Length

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 345
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.13 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours...

This window displays information about OSPF Virtual Neighbours.

Note:

If one (or both) of the virtual link endpoints are connected to the transit area via an
unnumbered link, it may be impossible to calculate the IP address of the virtual interface
and/or of the virtual neighbour, thereby causing a fail of the virtual link.

Column Description

Area Transit area identifier.

IP Address IP address of this virtual neighbour.

Virtual Neighbour Router Unique identifier of the virtual neighbour router.


ID

LSA Import LSA import state with this virtual neighbour (OFF/ON).

Type-of-Service Routing Type-of-Service Routing state with this virtual neighbour


(OFF/ON).

346 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

State State of the relationship with this virtual neighbour.

Events Number of times this virtual neighbour relationship has changed


state, or an error has occurred.

Retransmission Queue Current length of the retransmission queue.


Length

Hello Suppressed Indicator whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbour.

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry
Details window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 347
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.14 OSPF Virtual Neighbours Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> Virtual
Neighbours... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the Virtual Neighbours Info
list.

Notes:

The timeout interval has to be longer than 40 s (e.g. 60 s). The default value for timeout is 40
s, so it has to be changed manually.

Fields which are left blank will be set to the default values.

348 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.15 OSPF LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB...

This window displays information about the Link State Database of the SURPASS hiT 7070.
For each LSA in the database, there is one row in this table.

Column Description

Area Identifier of the Area from which the LSA was received.

Type Type of the Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating router in the Autonomous


System.

Sequence Sequence number.

Age [s] Age of the link state advertisement in seconds.

Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement,


excepting the age field.

Link State Advertisement Number of Link State Advertisements.


(LSA)

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 349
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF LSDB Entry Details window.

350 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.16 OSPF LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> LSDB... ->
Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF LSDB Info list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 351
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.17 OSPF External LSDB Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...

This window displays information about the external LSA database in the SURPASS hiT
7070.

Column Description

Type Type of the external Link State Advertisement.

Link State ID Either a Router ID or an IP Address.

Ext LSDB Router ID Unique identifier of the originating external router.

Sequence Sequence number.

Age [s] Age of the external link state advertisement in seconds.

Checksum Checksum of the complete contents of the advertisement,


excepting the Age field.

Ext Link State Number of external Link State Advertisements.


Advertisement

352 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Details...

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the OSPF External LSDB Entry Details
window

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 353
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

32.18 OSPF External LSDB Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> IP dynamic Routing (OSPF) -> EXT LSDB...
-> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the OSPF EXT LSDB Info
list.

354 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

33 TCP Settings

33.1 TCP Connections Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections...

This window displays information about the listening TCP ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070
and all the currently established TCP connections.

There is one row in this table for each open TCP port in the SURPASS hiT 7070.

Column Description

State State of this TCP port: Port is in Listening


mode or a TCP connection is established.

Local Address Local IP address for this TCP connection.

Local Port Local port number for this TCP connection.

Remote Address Remote IP address for this TCP connection.

Remote Port Remote port number for this TCP connection.

Details...

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 355
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

If an entry in the table is selected, this button opens the TCP Connections Entry Details
window.

Notes:

All ports in the SURPASS hiT 7070 are displayed in this table, including the ports used
internally.

The TCP connections which are established with TNMS systems (for management) can also
be displayed via the
Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of the SCOH symbol -> Configuration
-> MCF... -> Transport connections -> Information....

Here the IP connections can be identified by a 17-byte NSAP-like address which starts with
"54" and contains the IP address, e.g. 540072872203XXXXXXXXXXXX0100001.

356 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

33.2 TCP Connections Entry Details

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> TCP/IP -> TCP Connections... -> Details...

This window displays detail information about the selected entry in the TCP Connections Info
list.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 357
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34 Data

34.1 Subrack Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the Subrack
symbol -> Configuration...

Customer Specific tab:

In the Customer Specific tab, the customer can enter specific inventory data of the subrack.
Value range: 0...128 characters

Vendor Specific tab:

The Vendor Specific tab is read-only, displaying vendor specific inventory data of the subrack.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 359
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.2 ASIC Data Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol -
> Information -> ASIC Data...

This window gives information about the ASIC(s) on the card.

360 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.3 Copy Data

This window is accessible via the port connections (after clicking the symbol an interface card
or packet switch fabric card in the Module View), by using the context menu of a symbol in the
port list -> Subview... -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data... (or repeatedly Subview -> traffic
symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)

With this window, you can transfer alarm and data configurations of a AU4 or VCn to one or
more other objects of the same type, i.e. either from one card to another or object
configurations within the same card

Note:

Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping of the subrack).

Copy Items

This area allows to select the configuration types to be copied:

Alarm configurations

Traffic configurations (not with AU4 traffic flow symbols)

Performance configurations (not with E12 and E3 traffic flow symbols)

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 361
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Copy Units

This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.

Copy Card Data

How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object

362 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.4 Copy Card Data

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of a card symbol
(except SCOH and CLU) -> Copy Card Data...

This window allows to transfer data configurations of a card to one or more other empty
equivalent slots.

Note:

Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

Copy Units

This area displays the source to be copied, and allows to select the target(s). At least one
target must be selected.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to select all
entries in the list.

Copy Data

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 363
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.5 DB Management Configuration

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Config DB Management...

In this window, you can configure DB management (VCDB) settings.

The VCDB contains the complete configuration data for the NE, stored in the SCOH drawer in
a non-volatile memory.

You can save the current VCDB for future use, by uploading it to the LCT/NCT or OS. You
can revert to that VCDB by downloading it from the LCT/NCT or OS, e. g. in case of a
card/software change or failure.

NE State

The NE State can be set to Active or Idle.

Active Config DB:

Configuration ID

Wrap-around counter which is increased on each persistent configuration change.

Config DB Action

Possible Settings:

364 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

NE State Config DB Action

Active no

Idle no

Set to Default Config DB

Set to Previous Config DB

How to Download VCDB Files

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 365
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.6 DB Download Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Config DB Management... (with NE State set to "idle") -> Download... -> (in the opened
window, select the relevant file) -> Open.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

Note: A stop of the download will cause a SCOH reboot, which does not affect the traffic.

How to Download VCDB Files

366 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.7 DB Upload Dialog

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Config DB Management... -> Upload... -> (in the opened window, enter the file name) ->
Save.

This window allows to control and monitor the DB upload process.

By pressing the Start button, the upload process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the upload process can be terminated.

Note:

In case of DB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.

How to Upload VCDB Files

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 367
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.8 NE Logs Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Logs... -> NE Logs...

Configuration Log tab:

The list contains one entry for each single configuration change.

Click the column header to sort the column.

If an list entry is selected, the Show Details... button opens the Log Records Attribute
window.

Historical Event Log tab:

The list contains one entry (one single line) for each single alarm of the requested historical
event log.

Click the column header to sort the column.

Both NE logs can be saved using the Save button in the tool bar

or via the File -> Save as... command in the Main Menu.

368 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.9 Log Records Attribute

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Logs... -> NE Logs... (in the NE Logs Info window, Configuration Log tab, select an object)
-> Show Details...

This window displays details of the selected object.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 369
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

34.10 Copy to Permanent MACs


A very quick copy process window appears.

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, port list, by using the context
menu of a PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... -> Learned
MACs tab -> Copy to Permanent button

This window shows the progress bar, symbolizing the copying process from the Learned
MACs list to the Permanent MACs list.

370 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35 Performance

35.1 Ethernet Packet Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an Ethernet
card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> ETH #n -> Performance -> Packets...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 371
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Value Date, time, TMP and frames of the current interval

Current 15min Corresponding entries

Current 24h Corresponding entries

Tx Incoming ETH traffic

Rx Outgoing ETH traffic

TMP
Elapsed time in the interval.

Lost Frames Queue Overflow Rx


If the flow control is disabled and the input traffic exceeds the VC capacity or the value of the
admission control, there will be lost frames. So the corrupt frames are counted.

Multicast Frames
Pause frames which are triggered by the flow control, are counted as well.

Bad Frames CrC Error Rx


Corrupted frames which enter the port.

Dropped Frames Tx
Frames which are coming from the SDH side, and are being dropped. This may have the
following reasons:
The port is set to multichannel, the opposite side sends without being set to multichannel
mode, or vice versa.
The GFP Assignment ID (Extension header) is wrong.
Frames coming from SDH side are corrupted because of signal degrade.

Invalid VLAN or Untagged Frames (in case of IFQGBEB or IFQGBEB-E in VLAN modes)
Frames received at the gigabit port in downstream direction tagged with a VLAN ID not
assigned (unknown) to any downlink GFP channel or that are untagged.

Note: To see the current state, you need to push the Update button.

Previous 15 min tab:

The tab contains packet statistics, which were obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry.

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

372 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains packet statistics that were obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the oldest entry. 15 min intervals
are also contained in the list.

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 373
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.2 AU4 PJE Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFQ622M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> 4 x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4 #n ->
Performance -> AU4 PJE...

This window contains a tab control with three cards: One for the current 15 min and 24 h
performance values, one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

Current

The rows in this field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
AU4 performance monitoring is enabled. If AU4 performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval

Time Time of the current interval

374 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)

-PJE The negative pointer actions are counted

+PJE The positive pointer actions are counted

Previous 15 min tab:

The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 15 min and 24 h interval. The
last 16 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entry.

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains a list of pointer actions that occurred within a 24 h (also 15 min) interval. The
last 3 measuring intervals are displayed. Further entries overwrite the oldest entries. 15 min
intervals are also contained in the list.

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 375
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.3 STM-64 Gauge Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections in the port list, by using the context menu
of an IFS10G card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-64 -> Performance -> OS Near End Gauge...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

376 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Enable TCA Monitoring

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Avg. BER Average BER of the current interval

Max. BER Maximal BER within the current interval

Available Time Time within the current interval

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h:

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper threshold or Lower
threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower threshold and no UAS occurs.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 377
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

378 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.4 MSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 379
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

380 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 381
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

382 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.5 MSTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> MS Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 383
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

384 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 385
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous 15 min and 24 h values

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

386 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.6 RSTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an IFO155M
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> STM-n -> Performance -> RS Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 387
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold in the table below or at least one defect has
occurred.

Layer Threshold

VC2 30%

VC3 30%

VC4 30%

VC12 30%

STM-1 RS-Layer 30%

STM-1 MS-Layer 15%

388 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

STM-4 RS-Layer 50%

STM-4 MS-Layer 25%

STM-16 RS-Layer 75%

STM-16 MS-Layer 30%

STM-64 RS-Layer 40%

STM-64 MS-Layer 30%

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 389
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear All Previous Values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

390 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.7 VCCTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

The errors/defects which are detected from the CTP of its own.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 391
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

392 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 393
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

394 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.8 VCCTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an SDH
interface card symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> n x AU4/VC4 -> Subview... -> AU4/VC4
#n -> Performance -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

The errors/defects which are detected from the far NE and send via G1/V5 byte.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 395
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals.

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab.

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

396 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 397
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

398 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.9 VCTTP Near End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a
VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 399
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

400 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 401
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

402 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.10 VCTTP Far End Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, e.g. by using the context
menu of a PF2G5 symbol -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview (by using the context menu of a
VC4 #n symbol) -> Performance -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

Note:

The number of used VCn monitoring channels must not exceed half of the available channels.

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 403
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

404 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark grey color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 405
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

406 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.11 VC12 Near End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview...
-> VC12 -> Performance... -> Near End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 407
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of EBs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

408 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 409
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

410 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.12 VC12 Far End Performance

This window is only accessible with the SURPASS hiT 7070 SC single-row subrack via the
port connections in the port list, by using the context menu of an IF2M symbol -> Subview...
-> VC12 -> Performance... -> Far End...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 411
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately.

The tick button and the cross button enable/disable all checkboxes in this tab

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.
The connection supervision for lower order VC3, VC2, VC12 is disabled by default.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn’t depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection:

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

BBE Accumulated Block Errors. One BBE occurs each time a block has one or
more bit errors and SES/UAS are not counting. When SES/UAS are counting,
the BBE counter is frozen.

ES Accumulated Errored Seconds. One second period in which one or more


BBEs occur or at least one defect has occurred.

SES Accumulated Severely Errored Seconds. One second period in which the
number of Ebs (Errored Block:: a block in which one or more bits are in error)
has crossed the threshold or at least one defect has occurred.

UAS Accumulated Unavailable Seconds. The unavailable time always starts after 10
consecutive SES and includes those 10 seconds and ends after 10 consecutive
seconds without SES excluding those 10 seconds. During unavailable time all the
other counters are frozen.

412 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

TCA 15 min, TCA 24 h, TCA UAT:

Monitoring enabled

Set the checkbox, to individually connect the monitoring of the upper BBE, ES, SES and UAS
fields.

If the value of the measurement point is equal or greater then the regarding threshold value,
the corresponding field is shaded red (if TCA and Enable Performance Monitoring are set). If
the TCA is cleared, the field is shaded dark gray.

If TCA is disabled and if the threshold for this TCA is exceeded (alarm present), the TCA
alarm is cleared.

TCA 15 min

The TCA thresholds for 15 min monitoring are set in the fields Upper Threshold or Lower
Threshold that dictate when the alarm will be triggered or cleared. It is triggered immediately
when the Upper Threshold is crossed and cleared when the entire 15 min interval is below the
Lower Threshold and no UAS occurs.

TCA 24 h

The TCA threshold for 24 h monitoring are set in the field Upper Threshold. The TCA is raised
immediately when the threshold is crossed. All 24 h raised TCA types are always
autonomously reported with the state Cleared at the end of the day (no matter any parts of
this 24 h period have been declared as unavailable time) or if the date is changed.

TCA UAT

The TCA is raised/cleared immediately when UAT start/stop counting and it is enabled, the
according field is displayed in red/dark gray color. If the TCA monitoring for a point or the
Enable Performance Monitoring checkbox is cleared, the field is displayed in dark gray color.

TCA Threshold Range:

The 15 min high level threshold must be higher or equal than the 15 min TCA low level
threshold. The 15 min and 24 h TCA thresholds must have the correct value ranges that hold
identically for near and far end.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 15 min

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 413
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records

Previous 24 h

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

414 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

35.13 GFP Frames Performance

This window is accessible via the Module View, Subrack 1 tab, by using the context menu of
an IFQGBEB card symbol -> Configuration -> Card... -> VLAN Concentrator Functionality
State : VLAN C -> Apply
In the port list by using the context menu of the IFQGBEB port symbol -> Subview... -> GFP
Group #n -> Performance -> GFP Frames...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 415
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The checkbox is set to enable or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

The rows in the table display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h intervals, when
ETH performance monitoring is enabled. If ETH performance monitoring is disabled, the
current 15 min/24 h interval is cleared. The previous data is retained.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval

Time Time of the current interval

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds)

Dropped Frames Tx Discarded downstream frames due to queue overflow. (i.e.


tagged ethernet downstream on gigabit uplink exceeding
its assigned VC capacity)
One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained
GFP channels.

Dropped Frames Rx Transferred downstream ethernet frames from gigabit


uplink towards assigned downlink VC.
One counter per GFP group, accumulating all contained
GFP channels.

Average Throughput Rx Average throughput of transferred downstream bytes of


[bytes/s] ethernet frames in the passed measuring interval.

Previous 15 min tab:

The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 15 min interval. The last 16
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry.

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

Previous 24 h tab:

The tab contains packet statistics, which where obtained within a 24 h interval. The last 3
measuring intervals are displayed. A new entry overwrites the last entry. 15 min intervals are
also contained in the list.

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

416 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

36 RPR

36.1 RPR Switch Configuration

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration...

L2 Switch tab:

Supervision

Set the checkbox to enable supervision.

RPR Node ID [0..63]

Enter the RPR node ID.

Protection Wait to Restore Time [1s..300s]

Enter the Wait to Restore Time.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 417
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Protection Hold Off Time [0..2000 x 10ms]

Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.

Permanent MACs tab:

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

In the table, you can add a new, or delete an existing list entry.

Learned MACs tab:

Life Time Value [Disabled, 2..1440 min]

Enter the life time value or disable the life time restriction.

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

Select CUG ID [0..4095]

Select the CUG ID, or request the learned MAC entries.

The table shows the permanent MACs. You can copy to permanent MAC or delete an
existing list entry.

Topology tab:

Filter

Select the preferred filtering options and set or reset the filter.

Ring Not Closed

Informs you about the ring configuration.

The table shows the learned MACs.

Card Release tab:

Card Release Switch

Values: Cleared, Forced Switch, Lockout.

418 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Card Release State

Shows the current card state.

How to Configure RPR Protection

Copy to Permanent MACs

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 419
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

36.2 RPR Ring Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR 3 o’clock or 9 o’clock -> Performance -> RPR
Ring...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

420 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Stream Frames Rx Number of received stream frames.

Best Effort Frames Rx Number of received best effort frames.

Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Throughput Stream Throughput of received stream frames.


Frames Rx [byte]

Throughput Best Effort Throughput of received best effort frames.


Frames Rx [byte]

Average Throughput Average number of received bytes per second..


Stream Rx [bytes/s]

Average Throughput Average number of received bytes per second..


Best Effort Rx [bytes/s]

Layer Threshold

VC4 30% (2400 BBE/s)

STM-4 RS-Layer 50% (4000 BBE/s)

STM-4 MS-Layer 30% (9600 BBE/s or 2400 BBE/s for each channel)

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 421
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

422 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

36.3 RPR Feeder Performance

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of an PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> LP #n -> Performance -> RPR Feeder...

This window contains three tabs: One for the current 15 min and 24 h performance values,
one for the previous 15 min and one for the previous 24 h values.

Current tab:

Enable Performance Monitoring

This checkbox is set to enabled or cleared to disable the performance monitoring.

If the checkbox is set (Performance Monitoring state = enabled):

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 423
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

The two rows in the Current field display the current measurement in 15 min and 24 h
intervals

If the checkbox is cleared:

The current 15 min values are deleted

The remaining data is retained

The precondition for TCA processing is cleared; raised TCAs are cleared immediately

Note:
The counters only counts if the connection supervision of this object is enabled.

In case of termination point monitoring and port monitoring the PM doesn't depend on them.

Current

The rows in this field represent the types of monitored current performance values - current
15 min and current 24 h. For each performance measurement point, one read only edit field
displays the current accumulated values. All the counters have a delay of 10 seconds due to
UAS detection.

Display Meaning

Date Date of the current interval.

Time Time of the current interval.

TMP Duration of the measuring interval (in seconds).

Broadcast Frames Rx Number of received broadcast frames.

Broadcast Frames Tx Number of transmitted broadcast frames.

Multicast Frames Rx Number of received multicast frames.

Multicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted multicast frames.

Unicast Frames Rx Number of received unicast frames.

Unicast Frames Tx Number of transmitted unicast frames.

Lost Frames Ingress Stream Number of receiving overflow conditions.


Queue Overflow Rx

Lost Frames Egress Stream Number of transmitting overflow conditions.


Queue Overflow Tx

Lost Frames Ingress Best Effort Number of receiving overflow conditions.


Queue Overflow Rx

Dropped Frames Rx Number of dropped frames in the received signal.

Total Throughput Rx [bytes] Total number of received bytes.

424 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Total Throughput Tx [bytes] Total number of transmitted bytes.

Average Throughput Rx Average number of received bytes per second..


[bytes/s]

Average Throughput Tx [byte/s] Average number of transmitted bytes per second.

Previous 15 min tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 15 min performance values of the previous 16 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Previous 24 h tab:

Clear all previous values 15 min and 24 h

Set the checkbox, to clear all previous 15 min and 24 h performance records.

The list contains the 24 h performance values of the previous 3 measuring intervals for the
transport function.

Note:

The time values are dependent on the option settings window. If the option time display
changed, the time values will be updated after clicking Update.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 425
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

36.4 Adding a Permanent Entry

This window is accessible via the port connections, by using the context menu of a PF2G5
symbol in the port list -> Subview... -> RPR Switch -> Configuration... tab: Permanent MACs -
> Add...

CUG ID [0..4095]

Allows to select the CUG ID.

Port ID [1..4]

Allows to select the Port ID.

Node ID [0..63]

Allows to select the Node ID.

MAC Address

Allows to enter the unique MAC address.

426 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

37 Security

37.1 Access Information

This window is accessible via its toolbar button

The window shows the actual access right.

You:

The NSAP of the element manager, which currently owns the "write access".

Nobody:

If the element manager which currently owns the "write access" is connected via F interface,
"F-interface" is shown.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 427
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

37.2 NMS NE Password

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password...

The NE stores 3 individual passwords for the operating systems:

OS, LCT and NCT.

Each system can change its assigned password, i.e. OS can change only the OS password in
the NE, LCT can only change LCT password and NCT can only change the NCT password in
the NE. In addition, every operating system can reset the other passwords inside the NE to
the default password.

For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD

As usual, when changing the current password, the operator must enter the current password
and type the new password twice.

Password build rule:

The password must have 8 ASCII printable characters at minimum and 15 at maximum.

Independently if it is successful or not, each attempt to connect and to change a password will
be written into the Activity Log. This Activity Log can be requested by the operator.

Note:

When changing the OS (NMS) password via the LCT, the operator has to update the new
password manually in the DCN properties of the Network Element Controller (NEC).

If this is not done, any new initialization of NEC will fail.

428 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

37.3 Change Password to Default

This window is accessible via the Main Menu -> Security -> Change Password... -> Default...

Before setting a password to default, the current NMS NE password must be entered.

The available setting options depend on the NE control mode (LCT, NCT or OS).

For all OS, LCT and NCT the default password is: NEPASSWORD

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 429
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

38 Software

38.1 Software Management

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Software Management...

This window displays information about the active APS and the inactive APS and offers
software download functions.

Active APS:

Order Number

Identifies a delivered NE software version.

SW/FW Code

Identifies a delivered NE software version.

APS Record...

Opens the Active APS Record window.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 431
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Active APS Compatibility...

Opens the APS Compatibility Information window.

Inactive APS:

Load State

Load State Description

Not loaded No valid inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE,


and the software storage medium is not prepared for software download

Being loaded Software download in progress

Loaded A complete inactive APS is stored persistently in the NE

Being initialized The software storage medium is being prepared for software download

Initialized The software storage medium is prepared for software download

Order Number

Displays the order number of the inactive APS.

SW/FW Code

Displays the SW/FW code of the inactive APS.

Download... / Delta Download...

Opens a MS Windows standard File Open dialog for APS file selection.

Clicking Open opens the Software Download window.

If the download was successful and the load state is initialized, click Swap APS to set the
inactive APS to active

Swap APS

With the Swap APS button, a shutdown is automatically executed and a NE startup is
induced, using the previous inactive APS. If errors occur during a very early phase of the
startup, the NE startup is interrupted and a second reset is performed to revert the previous
APS.

After a successful swap, the previous APS becomes the inactive APS and vice versa.

432 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

38.2 Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol -
> Software Management... -> Download... -> (in the opened window, select the relevant file) -
> Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the software
download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 433
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

38.3 Delta Software Download

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management... -> Delta Download... -> (in the opened window, select the
relevant file) -> Open.

This window displays APS information and allows to control and monitor the delta software
download process.

By pressing the Start button, the download process begins.

By pressing the Stop button, the download process can be terminated.

434 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

38.4 Active APS Record

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management... -> APS Record...

This window displays details of the active APS record.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 435
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

38.5 APS Compatibility Information

This window is accessible via the Module View, by using the context menu of the NE symbol
-> Software Management... -> Active APS Compatibility...

This window displays the contents of the HW/SW compatibility of the active APS (Application
Program System) object in a tree structure.

436 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

39 Fault Clearance

39.1 NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the NE, Subrack and Microshelf can occur:

Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply"

Second Power Supply failed.

1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed"

Internal LAN failed.

1. Check LAN connections and configuration.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm Name "Telemetry Interface n"

see TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 437
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

438 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

39.2 Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

• IFO155M

• IFQ622M

• IFS2G5

• IFS2G5B

• IFQ2G5

• IFQ2G5B

• IFS10G

• IFS10GB

• IFS10G-M

• IFS10G-R

• IFS10G-WLS

• IFQGBE

• IFQBEB

• IFOFE

• IFS40G-MX

• IFSOA

• IFSOA-PDC

• IFSOB

• IFSOB-PDC

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to an optical interface card can occur:

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 439
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the card.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"

1. To clock failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"

1. T0X clock set failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

440 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Alarm name: "T0Y"

1. T0Y clock set failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n

Backplane signal failed.

1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"

Card unavailable.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Port Absent"

The port module is missing.

1. Insert a port module of correct type.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Port Mismatch"

The used port module type does not match the card interface.

1. Replace the port module by the correct type.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 441
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

442 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

39.3 Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

• IF2M

• IF345M

• IFO155M-E

• IFQGBE-E

• IFQGBEB-E

• IFOFE-E

• IFOFES-E

• IFOFGE-E

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to an electrical interface card can occur:

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the card.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 443
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"

Internal NE system clock failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct timing configuration.

2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

5. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ISTM Xn" or "ISTM Yn" or ISTM #n

Backplane signal failed.

1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service..

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"

Card failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "LSU n Missing" (only with IF2M cards)

Line Switching Unit missing.

1. Check the dedicated LSU.

2. Extract the IF2M card and insert it again to perform a cold start.
>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the LSU / IF2M card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

444 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Alarm name: "Protection Shelf Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)

Protection Shelf failed.

1. Check the connections and the configuration.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "2nd Power Supply" (only with IFO155M-E)

Second Power Supply failed.

1. Check the Power Supply connections and configuration.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Internal LAN Failed" (only with IFO155M-E)

Internal LAN failed.

1. Check LAN connections and configuration.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "PLC" (only with IFOFES-E)

Partial Loss of Capacity.

1. Check the configuration, what´s the minimum capacity (Mbit/s) of an LCAS group. If
there is a VC12-5v (5x 2.1 Mbit = 10.5 Mbit) and the threshold is set at 7, then the alarm
rises, when 2 VC12 have failed. This alarm occurs for Rx (PLCR), if received VCs are
failed, and Tx (PLCT), if the sent VCs are not present at the partner side. Even a wrong
(too high adjusted) PLC threshold has to be considered.

2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "TLC" (only with IFOFES-E)

Total Loss of Capacity

1. Check if all VCs of an LCAS group are failed. This alarm occurs also for Rx (TLCR) and
Tx (TLCT).

2. Check whether TTI informations for VCs are present.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 445
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "FELNE" (only with IFOFES-E)

FarEndLCAS not enabled. One side is configured with LCAS, and the other not (only VC
groups).

1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way, especially that in both sides LCAS
is configured.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "FOPR" (only with IFOFES-E)

Failure of Protocol. The LCAS protocol has CRC errors.

1. Check if there is a degraded SDH link.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "MND" (only with IFOFES-E)

Member Not Detectable. Several VCs of the LCAS group are not detectable or the delay
between each other is too great.

1. Check if all members of the LCAS-group have not more than 45 ms differential delay.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name:"SQM" (only with IFOFES-E)

Sequence mismatch. The number of the VCs inside of the LCAS group is inconsistent.

1. Check if both sides are configured in the same way.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

446 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 447
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

39.4 Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance


This help page applies to the following SURPASS hiT 7070 cards:

• PF2G5

• SF2G5

• SF10G

• SF160G

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to a switch fabric card can occur:

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the card.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

448 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Alarm name: "T0"

1. To clock failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"

1. T0X clock set failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0Y"

1. T0Y clock set failure.

2. Check the timing input.

3. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.n

Alarm name: "Failuer of ISTM Xn" or "Failure of ISTM Yn"

Backplane signal failed.

1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Failure of Internal Traffic Signal n"

Failure of Internal Traffic Signal.

1. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 449
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"

Card unavailable.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the card and insert it again to perform a cold start.


>>> This will interrupt the traffic transferred via this card! <<<

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

SCOH, CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

450 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

39.5 SCOH and CLU Card Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the SCOH and CLU cards can occur:

Alarm name: "EOW Unavailable"

EOW failed.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Fan Failure"

Both fan units missing or at least two fans failed.

1. Replace the fan unit immediately.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 451
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Alarm names: "Fan Unit 1 Failure", "Fan Unit 2 Failure"

One fan failed or at low speed.

1. Replace the fan unit soon.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Flash SW"

Flash SW failed.

For more information, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH

1. In case of a single Flash SW alarm, configure "Set to Idle" and "Set to Active".

2. If the alarm still persists, replace the defective MMC.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Major"

HW or SW alarm of the SCOH card.

1. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

2. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0"

T0 clock failure.

1. Check the timing input.

2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "T0X"

T0X clock set failure.

1. Check the timing input.

2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

452 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Alarm name: "T0Y"

T0Y clock set failure.

1. Check the timing input.

2. If it is correct, replace the SCOH card.

3. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "ULED Fail"

LED supply voltage (generated by SCOH for all cards) failed.

1. Replace the SCOH card.

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Alarm name: "Card Unavailable"

SCOH card unavailable.

1. Be sure to use the correct card and software versions.

2. Extract the SCOH card and insert it again to perform a cold start.

3. If the alarm persists, replace the card.

4. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 453
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

39.6 TIF Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The following equipment alarms related to the TIF interface can occur:

As a basic principle, TIF alarms relate to faults that are not in the home NE.

SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance

NE, Subrack and Microshelf Fault Clearance

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

Fan Unit Fault Clearance

454 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

39.7 Fan Unit Fault Clearance

Before opening the subrack, or removing any cards or cables, or performing any maintenance
work, please observe the safety and handling instructions given in the OGL (Operator
Guidelines) manual.

The red fault LED indicates at least one fan is at low speed or failed.

Alarm name: "Fan Failure"

At least one fan is at low speed or failed.

1. Replace the fan unit according to the alarm types: "Fan Failure" and "Fan Unit 1/2
Failure",
see SCOH and CLU Fault Clear Clearance

2. If the alarm still persists, contact the Siemens Customer Service.

Optical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Electrical Interface Card Fault Clearance

Switch Fabric Card Fault Clearance

TIF Fault Clearance

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 455
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

40 How to... (General Tasks)

40.1 How to Configure NSAP Settings

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. n the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> Stack
Parameters -> Configuration

3. In the Stack Parameters Config window, Layer 3 (NSAP) field, you can change the
address settings, see MCF Stack Parameters Configuration.

Note:

The NSAP settings have critical influence on the entire network configuration and must not be
changed without prior agreement of the network administrator.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 457
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

40.2 How to Configure the Subrack Equipping

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol where you want to change the NE
equipment. A submenu appears, displaying all possible card types of this slot.

3. Click the required card type and configure the ports, if applicable. The card symbol of
the selected card type is added to the Module View.

4. For further configurations, right-click the card symbol, and on the submenu, click
Configuration.

How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports

SF2G5/SF10G Limitations in the Single-row Subrack

458 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

40.3 How to Configure / Remove Traffic Cards

Configuring a traffic card:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click a slot number symbol.

3. Select a card from the context menu.

4. Select the Provisioning Modes, separately for each port if applicable.

5. Click Apply.
The card will be added to the required equipping.

6. You can change the Provisioning Modes later on via the context menu of the card ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...

7. For further configurations, use the context menus of the card symbol and of the
associated symbol(s) in the port list (appearing when the card symbol is clicked).

Removing a traffic card from the required equipping:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the slot number symbol.

3. Select Empty or Empty-Auto (or another card type) from the context menu.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 459
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

40.4 How to Configure PDH and SDH Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click a PDH or SDH interface card symbol -> Configuration ->
Port Provisioning...

2. A Port Provisioning Config window opens.


(An equivalent Card Equipment Config window opens automatically when a slot is newly
equipped with a SDH interface card.)

3. Select Empty for every unused port.

4. Select Working or one of the offered protection schemes for every used port.

5. In protection case, the involved partner slots are displayed. Be sure that they are
equipped with the same card type and configured properly.

6. Click Apply.

How to Configure the Subrack Equipping

460 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

40.5 How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object
to Object

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the correct
Subrack tab is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, click the symbol an interface card or packet switch fabric card.

3. In the port list, select a port symbol -> right-click Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy
Data...
(or repeatedly Subview -> traffic symbol -> Copy Data..., if applicable)

4. In the Copy Data window, Copy Items area, set the checkbox(es) of the configuration(s)
you want to copy,
or click All Items to copy all configurations shown in the list.

5. In the Copy Units area, the Source field displays the source slot number and card name.

6. In the Targets field, the slot numbers of the possible targets are displayed.

7. Select the target(s) to where you want to copy the configuration settings.
To select more than one target, use the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys, or click All Targets to
select all entries in the list.

8. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.

Note:

Copy Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be copied
because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 461
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

40.6 How to Copy Card Configurations from Object to Object

1. In the Module View, right-click a suitable card symbol -> Copy Card Data...

2. In the Copy Card Data window , the Source field displays the source slot number and
card name.

3. In the Targets field, the slot numbers for the possible targets are displayed.

4. Select the target to where you want to copy the configuration settings or click All Targets
to select all entries in the list.

5. Click Apply. The selected configuration of the source card is copied to the card/cards
selected in the Targets field.

Note:

Copy Card Data may raise errors in the message list for objects/attributes, which cannot be
copied because of hardware limitations (possible equipping).

How to Copy Alarm, Performance and Traffic Configurations from Object to Object

462 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

40.7 How to Configure ETH Cards and Debugging

Configuring ETH cards:

1. Set the dedicated MUX structure (only IFOFES-E):


Select the card -> Configuration -> VC4 Subview... -> VC4 (Mux) #n -> Subview -> VC4
-> Configuration -> Mux Preparation.

2. Set the concatenation (only IFOFES-E):


Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

3. Select a template (not with IFOFES-E):


You should think before, which VC´s (capacity) are being used and then set a template,
cause a belated modification is only possible with traffic interruption of all ports.
Select the card -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

Note: Adjacent VC4-4v can be changed over, via "Modify Template", to VC4-2v.. VC4-
6v. The total sum must be always 8 VC4.

4. Setting of Bandwidth and Subchanneling:


Select the card -> Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

5. Switching the VC´s:


E.g. for a VC12-5v, 3 VC12 are switched via one SDH card/port and the other 2 VC12
via another SDH card/port. Therefore, not a VC12-5v must be selected, but the
particular VC12´s in the cross connection window.

6. Concerning LCAS:
For all involved VC´s, LCAS must be activated.

ETH traffic is not running:

1. Is the ETH link o.k.?


Check the ETH Configuration window.

2. Check the "Signal Label" and the "TTI" with the VC4 Configuration window.
When virtual concatenation is configured, check all single VCs (if o.k. the SDH
connection is sure).

3. Both partners must have the same subchanneling entries (on or off). See GFP
Assignment window.

4. If subchanneling is configured, check that channel ID is identical with both partners.

5. Are VCAT groups at both partners configured the same way (both with LCAS activated
or not; no mixed way)?

6. With the Ethernet Packet Performance window, you can see, wether port traffic is
coming/going (Rx/Tx). If all is dropped at Tx, then probably the subchanneling or the
subchannel ID is wrong configured (Sink and Source port is not the same).

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 463
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

41 How to... (Timing)

41.1 How to Configure the Timing

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...

T0:

2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window , right-click the T0 symbol ->


Configuration...

3. Select the Requested Timing Source for T0:


T1 (STM signals), T3 (external clock input), Auto Selection (depending of the quality of
the available clock pulses) or Free Running (in case no clock input is available).

- Forced selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, the received
quality levels of the timing references, and any Manual selections.
- Manual selection overrides the priority orders of the timing references, but does not
override the received quality levels of the timing references, or any Forced selections.

4. Click Apply. Click Close.

T1:

5. If a T1 timing source is used, right-click the T1 symbol -> Configuration...


In the T1 Config window, Timing References tab, select the card(s) and port(s) used as
timing references.

6. Click Apply. Click Close.

T3:

7. If a T3 timing source is used, right-click the T3 symbol -> Configuration...


In the T3/T4 Config window, select the T3 mode and SSM settings (quality information
about the used clock pulse, transmitted in the MSOH of the STM-n signal)

8. Click Apply. Click Close.

9. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, SA-Bit selection field next to the T3
symbol, select the SA bit(s) to be used with T3.

10. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T0 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 or T3 timing source and define a priority relating to the T0 system
clock selection.

11. You can lock out each T1 and T3 timing source (so that it is generally not available as a
synchronization reference) by clicking the green hook next to the T0 Prio field. A red
cross will appear indicating the lockout state of this timing source.
To reset the lockout state, click the red cross.

T4:

12. Right-click the T4 symbol -> Configuration...

13. In the T3/T4 Config window, select the Requested Timing Source for T4, the T4 Mode,
and the Minimum Quality Threshold for T4.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 465
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

14. Click Apply. Click Close.

15. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, T4 Prio column, right-click the yellow field
next to each used T1 timing source, and define a priority relating to the T4 clock output
selection.

16. In the SA-Bit selection field next to the T4 symbol, select the SA bit to be used with T4.

17. In the left-hand bottom part of the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, you can
enable the Use of SSM for Selection and you can select the Wait to Restore (WTR)
Time.

18. Click Apply. Click Close.

466 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

41.2 How to Set Sync Priorities

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> SEC...)

2. In the Synchronous Equipment Clock window, right-click the T0 Prio or T4 Prio field of
the concerned T1 or T3 clock, select the priority (1 = highest) or "do not use".
If the selected priority number is not unique within T0 Prio or T4 Prio, the system will
change the other priorities automatically.

3. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 467
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

42 How to... (Alarms)

42.1 How to Configure the Visible Alarm Signaling

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Option Settings button.

2. In the Option Settings window, select the Alarm Severity Threshold to be displayed.
No alarms with lower priority will be displayed.

3. If the Alarm Flash checkbox in the General field is disabled, an alarm is indicated by
highlighting the concerned symbol(s) permanently red, instead of flashing red.

4. Click OK.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 469
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

42.2 How to Suppress Alarms

Suppressing Equipment or SEC Alarms

1. In the Module View, right-click the relevant symbol -> Fault -> Equipment Alarms... or
SEC Alarms...
(In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or
flashing red.).

2. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).


Raised alarms are displayed at the top of the list.

3. Click Apply.

Suppressing Communication Alarms

1. In the Module View, click the relevant card symbol.


(In case of an already raised alarm, the concerned symbols are highlighted red or
flashing red.).

2. In the traffic view, right-click the card symbol -> Subview... -> STM-n or En-> Fault ->
Communication Alarms...

3. In the Alarm window, set the Suppression checkbox of the alarm(s).

4. Click Apply.

470 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

42.3 How to Configure TIF Ports

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> TIF...

2. In the NE - TIF #n Config window, enter an individual name and select the Closed or
Open input polarity for each used TIF port.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 471
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43 How to... (Cross Connections)

43.1 How to Set or Clear Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting cross connection filter options:

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, Filter area, use the selection fields to select the
filtering features.

3. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all cross connection filter settings:

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Reset Filter. The selection field settings
change to All.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 473
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.2 How to Create a Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the CC Type, VC Level and Concatenation
Counter N value (if applicable).

TP A:

4. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.

5. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

TP B:

6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.

7. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

8. If no TP B’ termination point is required, proceed with step #12.

TP B’:

9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross
connection end point.
(The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)

10. Click the button "To TPB' >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.
In the TP Selection list, the involved TPs are marked by asterisks.

13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

474 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.3 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC12 Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 VC Level.

4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.

6. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.

8. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.

10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 475
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.4 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC3 Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC3 VC Level.

4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.

6. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.

8. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.

10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

476 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.5 How to Create an SDH-SDH VC4 Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC4 VC Level.

4. The SDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.

6. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.

8. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

9. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 7 and 8 with TPB'.

10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

1. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 477
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.6 How to Create an SDH-ETH VC12/VC3 Cross Connection

1. Before a VC12 cross connection on the ETH card could be done, the multiplex structure
on the ETH card must be changed to VC12.

2. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the connection type.

5. Select the VC12/VC3 connection layer.

6. Select an SDH card in the Card A Selection field, select a TP in the TP A Selection field.

7. Select an Ethernet card in the Card B Selection field, select a TP in the TP B Selection
field.

8. The SDH and Ethernet card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-
>Close).

9. Select the applicable TP indexes.

Attention: On the TP, which relates to the ETH card, the LCT offers always all possible
TP indexes of the VC level (i.e. 3x VC3 and 63x VC12).

10. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

11. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

12. Click Close. - The new cross connection is displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the filter settings).

13. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

478 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.7 How to Create a Cross Connection from a Tributary (Ethernet) Port to an


RPR

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. You can identify the TP allocation (tributary or ring side) via the GFP Assignment
window (-> Close).

3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC Level.

5. In the TP Selection area, select an Ethernet Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.

6. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. In the TP Selection area, select the PF2G5 card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.

8. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

11. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 479
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.8 How to Create an SDH-PDH Cross Connection

1. Only in case of using a microshelf:


Make sure that a LNQ622 and a Switch Fabric card are additionally installed in subrack
1.

2. In the tool bar, click the Cross Connection List button.

3. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the VC12 LC Layer.

5. The SDH and PDH card classifications can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (->
Close).

6. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.

7. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

8. In the TP Selection area, select the LNQ622M card or an IF2M / IF345M card
respectively, and select the VC number you want as cross connection end point.

9. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

10. If applicable (depending on the connection type), repeat steps 8 and 9 with TPB'.

11. The SDH card classification can be displayed by clicking Graphic... (-> Close).

12. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

13. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

14. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

480 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.9 How to Add and Remove Path Protections

Adding a path protection:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select an unprotected cross connection.


Click Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...

4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type field, select the equivalent protected
cross connection type.

5. In the TP Selection field, select the Card and the VC number you want as protection end
point.

6. Click Add Protection.

Removing a path protection:

1. In the Main Menu, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection.


Click Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection in the list.
Click Modify...

4. Click Remove Work. Path or Remove Prot Path.

5. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.
The selected cross connection remains connected, but becomes unprotected.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 481
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.10 How to Create a Drop / Continue Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.

4. Select the VC Level.

5. Line West: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.


Click the button "To TPA >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

6. Line East: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.


Click the button "To TPB >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

8. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

9. Select the Unidirectional Tail End CC Type.

10. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 5.


Click the button "To TPB >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

11. In the TP Selection area, select the same settings as in step 6.


Click the button "To TPB' >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

12. Tributary: Select a card and a TP in the TP Selection area.


Click the button "To TPA >>".
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

13. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

14. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

15. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

482 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.11 How to Create a Broadcast Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.

4. Select the VC Level.

5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point

6. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point

8. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

9. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

10. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

11. Repeat the steps 5 to 10 depending on the required number of branches, with the same
card A and TP a settings.

12. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 483
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.12 How to Add a Branch to a Broadcast Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, find one branch of the existing broadcast cross
connection in the list.

3. Click Add...

4. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Unidirectional Unprotected CC Type.

5. Select the same VC Level as the existing branches have.

6. Select the same card A and TP A as the existing branches have.


Click To TP A >>.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

7. Select card B and TP B in the TP Selection field.


Click To TP B >>.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

8. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

9. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

10. You can display a graphic of all created cross connections by clicking
Graphic..

11. You can display a graphic of the TP relations of a selected cross connection by clicking
Details... (select the list entry) -> Graphic Details ...

484 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.13 How to Delete a Branch of a Broadcast Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the branch of the broadcast cross
connection.

3. Click Delete.

4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be deleted
after having deleted the last lower order cross connection.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 485
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.14 How to Disconnect a Cross Connection

1. In the Tool Bar, click the Cross Connections List button

2. In the Cross Connections List window, select the cross connection to be disconnected.

3. Click Disconnect.

4. Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

5. If the following message is displayed, confirm it: "The VC4 Path Cross Connection is
used in at least one combined Low Order Cross Connection".
It is displayed when more than one lower order cross connections use a higher order
cross connection. In this case, the higher order cross connection can only be
disconnected after having disconnected the last lower order cross connection.

486 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

43.15 How to Configure DCC Cross Connections

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> MCF... -> DCC ->
Configuration...

3. In the MCF - DCC Config window, DCC List, right-click the DCC channel you want to
configure.

4. On the submenu, click Configuration... to open the DCC Linkage Configuration window.

5. In this window, make the relevant settings.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 487
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

44 How to... (OH Cross Connections)

44.1 How to Set or Clear OH Cross Connection Filter Options

Setting OH cross connection filter options:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, in the Filter field of either tab, use the
selection fields to select the filtering features.

4. Click Set Filter to activate your filter settings. The table shows the available cross
connections depending on your filter settings.

Clearing all OH cross connection filter settings:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, click Reset Filter. The selection field
settings change to All.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 489
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

44.2 How to Create an OH Cross Connection

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH TP List tab, OH Termination Point list,
select the entry you want as OH cross connection start point.

4. Click Set as TP A. The selected OH cross connection start point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP A entry.

5. In the list, select the entry you want as OH cross connection end point.

6. Click Set as TP B. The selected OH Cross Connection end point appears in the New OH
Cross Connection area as TP B entry. The corresponding OH CC Type is displayed.

7. Click Connect.

490 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

44.3 How to Disconnect an OH Cross Connection

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the SCOH symbol -> Configuration -> OH Cross
Connections...

3. In the Overhead Cross Connections window, OH CC List tab, select the OH cross
connection you want to disconnect. The selected OH cross connection is displayed in
detail in the OH CC Options area.

4. Click Disconnect.

5. Confirm the acknowledgement window.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 491
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45 How to... (Protections)

45.1 How to Create / Delete a 1+1 MSP Line Protection

Creating a 1+1 MSP Protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the protecting SDH interface card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning...
Select Linear 1+1 MSP (Protection) for the port(s) of the card.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.
Click Apply.

3. To create the protection, right-click the card symbol. On the submenu, click Protection.

4. In the Protection Management window , select the respective 1+1 MSP in the list, and
click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).

5. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...

6. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration.

7. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select Activated and click Apply.
The 1+1 MSP protection is active.

Deleting a 1+1 MSP Protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, click one of the card symbols involved in the 1+1 MSP protection.

3. In the port list, right-click the port symbol -> Subview...

4. In the 1+1 MSP Traffic Flow window, right-click the 1+1 MSP symbol -> Configuration...

5. In the 1+1 MSP Config window, MSP Activation field, select De-activated and click
Apply. Confirm the warning message.

6. In the top segment of the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols ->
Protection...

7. In the Protection Management window , select the 1+1 MSP to be deleted and click
Delete.

8. To remove the protection completely, click theinvolved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.

9. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 493
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.2 How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 2F Shared Ring Protection (example IF2G5 card):

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5, card in one of the involved slots and select
the 2F Shared Ring provisioning mode.
If the partner slot has been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, it will be configured
automatically.

3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...

4. In the Protection Management list, select the 2F-SPRING and click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).

5. To activate the 2F Shared Ring Protection:


In the port list, right-click the port symbol with Provisioning Mode "2F Shared Ring..." ->
Subview... -> 2F-SPRING -> Configuration...

6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.

7. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, select "Activated" in the MSP Activation field.

8. Click Apply.

Deleting a 2F Shared Ring Protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the 2F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".

3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...

4. In the Protection Management window , select the 2F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.

5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.

6. Click Apply.

494 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.3 How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

Creating a 4F Shared Ring Protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, configure an IFS2G5 type, IFQ2G5 type or IFS10G type card in one
of the involved slots and select the 4F Shared Ring Protection provisioning mode.
If the 3 partner slots have been in Empty or Empty-Auto state before, they will be
configured automatically..

3. Right-click one of the involved card symbols and select Protection...

4. In the Protection Management list, select the 4F-SPRING and click Create.
The protection is created (marked by a green hook in the first column).

5. To activate the 4F Shared Ring Protection:


In the port list, right-click the card symbol with ProvMode "4F Shared Ring ..." ->
Subview... -> 4F-SPRING -> Configuration.

6. Configure the ring topology with a minimum of 3 nodes. Each node ID should be unique.

7. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, MSP Activation field, select "Activated".

8. Click Apply.

Deleting a 4F Shared Ring Protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the 4F SPRING Configuration window, set the MSP Activation to "De-activated".

3. In the Module View, right-click one of the involved card symbols -> Protection...

4. In the Protection Management window , select the 4F-SPRING to be deleted and click
Delete.

5. To remove the protection completely, click the involved protecting card symbol ->
Configuration -> Port Provisioning... -> Working.

6. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 495
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.4 How to Configure the Squelch Table for 2F or 4F Rings

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, click a 2.5-Gbit/s or 10-Gbit/s interface card symbol with created 2F-
SPRING or 4F-SPRING protection.

3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview... -> 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING ->
Configuration... -> Squelch...

4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, Squelch Table area, you can assign
the required Node Ids to each AU4.

5. Click Apply.

How to Create / Delete a 2-F SPRING Protection

How to Create / Delete a 4-F SPRING Protection

496 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.5 How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

Creating an IF2M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click the slot number
symbol that offers IF2M card protection, and select the IF2M (CP) card.

2. Configure the required number of IF2M cards in the working card slots.

3. Right-click each IF2M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.

4. Right-click the IF2M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.

Deleting an IF2M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove any
working IF2M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF2M (W) card symbol
-> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.

2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF2M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.

Note: Avoiding IF2M Traffic loss during exchange of an IF2M card in the card protection
scheme

Before plugging a "new/replaced" card into a working slot of an existing IF2M card protection
scheme, this card needs to get "deactivated". This means the operator needs to remove this
card from the required equipping. By this the card will be switched off. A switched-off card will
not perform an optimistic startup, so this card cannot destroy traffic in a protection group. A
deactivation can be done by one of the following methods:

a) If the card has to be transferred and was already plugged into an NE, the current slot shall
be set to "empty" while the card is plugged. By this action the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).

b) If the card was not plugged into an NE before (coming from the spare), it shall be put into
the respective working slot, it needs to get plugged into another free slot first, which is
configured to "empty" (not "auto-empty" !!). Also by this the card gets switched off (i.e.
deactivated).

If this is still not acceptable, then the only advise is, that the card shall not be put into the
respective working slot. Instead of this it shall be plugged in the protection slot and have it
started-up here. By this no traffic hits will occur because an optimistic startup in the protection
slot will not cause any traffic hits.

If you have to do this, please make sure that there are no faults on the Protection
group!

How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 497
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.6 How to Create / Delete an IF345M Card Protection

Creating an IF345M card protection:

5. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, right-click a slot number
symbol that offers IF345M card protection, and select the IF345M (CP) card.

6. Configure the required IF345M card in the working card slot.

7. Right-click the IF345M (W) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Add to Group.

8. Right-click the IF345M (CP) card symbol -> Card Protection -> Activate.

Deleting an IF345M card protection:

1. In the Module View of the single-row subrack or a microshelf, you can remove the
working IF345M card from the protection group by right-clicking the IF345M (W) card
symbol -> Card Protection -> Remove from Group.

2. To remove the complete protection group, right-click the IF345M (CP) card -> Card
Protection -> Remove Group.
Right-click the slot number symbol and select Empty or Empty-Auto.

How to Create / Delete an IF2M Card Protection

498 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.7 How to Create / Delete an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G Card Protection

Creating an SF2G5 card protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, configure an SF2G5 working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.

3. Configure an SF2G5 protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.

No further configurations are necessary.

Creating an SF10G card protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, configure an SF10G working card in a suitable odd numbered slot.

3. Configure an SF10G protecting card in a suitable even numbered slot.

No further configurations are necessary.

Creating an SF160G card protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, configure an SF160G working card in a suitable slot


(105 in the double-row subrack, 307 in the single-row subrack)

3. Configure an SF160G (CP) protecting card in a suitable slot


(107 in the double-row subrack, 308 in the single-row subrack)

No further configurations are necessary.

Deleting an SF2G5, SF10G or SF160G card protection:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, change the protecting slot configuration to Empty or to a working
card.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 499
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.8 How to Configure RPR Protection

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, click the PF2G5 card symbol.

3. In the port list, click the PF2G5 symbol -> Subview...

4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window: Right-click the RPR Switch symbol ->
Configuration...

5. In the RPR Switch Config window, L2 Switch folder, enter the RPR Node ID.

6. Enter the Protection Wait to Restore Time.

7. Enter the Protection Hold Off Time.


The Hold Off Time makes sure that the L2 protection is not triggered by a MSP, SNCP,
or RPR ring protection switching of other nodes.

8. Click Apply.

500 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.9 How to Create an SNCP Protection

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

3. In the Add Cross Connection window, select the Connection Type:


Bidirectional Protected or
Unidirectional Head End or
Unidirectional Tail End.

4. Select the VC Level (e.g. VC4).

TP A:

5. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection start point.

6. Click the button "To TPA >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP A entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

TP B:

7. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as cross
connection end point.

8. Click the button "To TPB >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

TP B’:

9. In the TP Selection area, select the Card and the VC number you want as TP B’ cross
connection end point.
(The TP B’ selections depend on the selected CC Type.)

10. Click the button "To TPB' >>"


The selected termination point appears in the New CC area as TP B' entry.
Select the TP Index, if applicable.

11. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

12. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

13. Configure the second end point in the same way, starting from step #3.

14. Configure all intermediate points in the same way, starting from step #3.

15. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

16. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 501
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.10 How to Add an SNCP Protection to an Existing LO Path

Preparing the multiplex structure for the protecting LO path:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the LO SF card symbol where the multiplex structure is to
be prepared -> Subview...

3. In the Selection window, right-click the VC4 (Mux) symbol to be structured -> Subview...

4. In the Mux Structure window, right-click the VC4 symbol -> Configuration...

5. To use VC12 containers, select the Mux Config window, VC4 Mux Preparation tab,
activate the "21 x TU-12" selection box of the related TUG #n.
To use VC3 containers, no VC4 preparation is necessary on the LO sub-networks.

6. Click the Apply button.

7. If LO concatenation is to be used:
In the context menus of the LO SF, select Configuration -> Concatenation... and create
the required concatenated containers.

Creating the LO cross connection (protecting path):

1. In the Module View, click the Cross Connection List button.

2. In the Cross Connections List window, right-click the SNCP cross connection to be
modified -> Details...

3. In the Cross Connection Details window, select the cross connection and click Modify...

4. In the Modify Cross Connection window, CC Type area, select Bidirectional Protected.

5. In the TP Selection area, select the TP A to be protected.


Click the button "To TPA >>"

6. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card (e.g. SF2G5).


Select the LO container from the VC4 that has been structured before.

7. Click the button "To TPB' >>"

Creating the HO VC4 cross connection (protecting path):

1. In the Cross Connections List window, click Add...

2. In the Add Cross Connection window, CC Type, select Bidirectional Protected.

3. Select the VC Level VC4.

4. In the TP Selection area, select the LO SF card and VC4 container that have been
selected in the previous steps.
Click the button "To TPA >>"

502 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

5. In the TP Selection area, select the SDH card and VC4 container to be used for the
protecting path.
Click the button "To TPB >>"

6. Click Propose Connection. - The proposed cross connection is displayed with blue text.

7. Click Connect. - The cross connection entry changes to black text if connected.

8. Click Close. - The new cross connections are displayed in the Cross Connections List
(depending on the Filter settings).

9. You can display an illustration of all created cross connections by clicking Graphic...

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 503
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.11 How to Set Up the Squelching Table

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, click an interface card symbol with created 2F-SPRING protection
or 4F-SPRING protection.

3. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...

4. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Traffic Flow window, right-click the 2F-SPRING or


4F-SPRING symbol -> Configuration...

5. In the 2F-SPRING or 4F-SPRING Config window, click Squelch...

6. In the Squelch Config window, assign the AU4 containers to their related NEs.

The following illustrations give an example:

504 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 505
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

45.12 How to Set Up a Microshelf Extension Link

1. Make sure that the internal LAN connection between the SURPASS hiT7070 SC or DC
subrack and the extension shelf is connected.

2. Make sure that the Subrack 1 tab is selected in the Module View.

3. In the Module View, insert an LNQ622M card.


In the Card Equipment Config window, configure a port.

4. Right-click the NE symbol -> Configuration -> Extension Shelf...


Configure a microshelf with a suitable subrack ID according to the table in the ITMN..

5. After the LNQ622M card is started up successfully, click the LNQ622M card symbol.

6. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...

7. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol
-> Configuration...

8. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.

9. In the upper part of the Module View, configure the second LNQ622M card.

10. In the Card Equipment Config window, active the Protection Port.

11. In the Port Provisioning window of the Protection card, select the entry Link Protection
with the number according to the actual configuration.

12. In the port list, right-click an port symbol -> Subview...

13. In the Extension Link Protection Traffic Flow window, right-click the Main ISTM4 symbol
-> Configuration...

14. In the Main ISTM4 Config window, Connection Identifier field, select the corresponding
ESM protection card of the microshelf.
Click Apply.

15. In the upper part of the Module View, right-click one of the LNQ622M cards symbols ->
Protection...

16. Select the entry in the list.


Click Create.

17. In the port list, right-click a port symbol -> Subview...


Now the protection group is available.

506 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

46 How to... (Concatenations)

46.1 How to Configure SDH Concatenations

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, click the SDH interface card symbol.

3. In the port list, right-click the card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

4. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Add... button.

5. In the Add Concatenation Group window, select the Concatenation Type, Group ID and
TPs, as applicable.

6. Click Apply.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 507
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

46.2 How to Configure ETH Concatenations

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click the ETH card symbol -> Configuration -> Concatenation...

3. In the Concatenation Config window, click the Template... button.

4. In the Concatenation Group Templates window, select one of the templates.

5. Click Apply.

508 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

47 How to... (GFP Configurations)

47.1 How to Create / Delete VC Channels

Creating VC channels:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment.

3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the VC/VC Group for
the GFP Group.

4. Click Apply.

Deleting VC channels:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module view, right-click the PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment.

3. In the GFP Assignment window, GFP-SDH Assignment list, select the GFP Group.

4. Set the VC/VC Group to Unassigned.

5. Click Apply
Confirm the warning message.

Note:

Never delete a VC group as long as still a GFP group is assigned!

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 509
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

47.2 How to Assign a GFP Group to VC Groups

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol.->


Configuration -> Concatenation...

3. In the Concatenation Config window, click Template... and select one of the
Concatenation Group Templates.
Click Apply.

4. Close the Concatenation Config window.

5. In the context menu of the card, select Configuration -> GFP Assignment....

6. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment or LP Bandwidth Configuration


area (as applicable), enter the bandwidth for each GFP Group.

7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message.

8. In the GFP-SDH Assignment area, select the VC/VC Group assignment for each GFP
group.

9. Click Apply.

10. Connect the SDH capacity with a path through the network.

11. Upload a VCDB for the NE.

Note:

To decommission ports, unassign them from the GFP group or disconnect a cross
connection.
If you unassign the GFP-SDH assignment, the device will be reset resulting in a short payload
interruption of all channels served by the card.

510 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

47.3 How to Set the Bandwidth of a GFP Sub-Channel

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click an Ethernet or packet switch card symbol ->
Configuration -> GFP Assignment.

3. In the GFP Assignment window, ETH-GFP Assignment area, enter the bandwidth value
for the concerned Ethernet port.

4. Click Apply. Confirm the warning message.

Note:

Check the sum of the bandwidths of all the Ethernet ports assigned to a GFP group. The sum
must be less than the SDH capacity you plan to assign to the GFP group. Exceeding the SDH
capacity may cause packet loss!

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 511
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

47.4 How to Create / Modify / Delete a CUG

Creating a CUG:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).

4. Click Port Config.

5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.

6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.

7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

8. Click CUG Management.

9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Add CUG to open the PF2G5 Add
CUG window.

10. In this window, make the relevant settings.

Modifying a CUG:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).

4. Click Port Config.

5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.

6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.

7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

8. Click CUG Management.

9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, change the CUG settings.

10. Click Apply.

512 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Deleting a CUG:

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable)..

4. Click Port Config.

5. In the Config window, select Multi2 CUG Mode.

6. Move at least one CUG ID from the Possible CUG ID values list to the CUG ID list.

7. Click Apply.
Confirm the warning message informing you that the traffic will be interrupted.

8. Click CUG Management.

9. In the Multi2 CUG Management Config window, click Remove CUG.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 513
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

47.5 How to Specify the CUG Service Class

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module view, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

3. In the GFP Assignment window, select an LP Port in the LP Bandwidth Configuration or


LP GFP Assignment area (as applicable).

4. Click Port Config...

5. In the Config window, select the CUG Mode and click Apply. Confirm the warning
message.

6. Click the CUG Management button.


(for configuration details, see Port Configuration for PF2G5 Cards

7. In the CUG Management Config window, Service Class field, select


Static Best Effort for fair access to the available bandwidth
or
Dynamic Prio 0 to Dynamic Prio 7: The service class of an incoming packet can be
determined dynamically based upon the VLAN tag of the packet.

8. Click Apply.

514 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

47.6 How to Read Out the RPR Performance Monitoring Statistic

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, click a PF2G5 card symbol.

3. In the port list, right-click the PF2G5 port symbol -> Subview....

4. In the GFP Group Traffic Flow window, right-click the RPR 3 o’clock or RPR 9 o’clock
symbol -> Performance -> RPR Ring. The RPR Ring Performance window opens.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 515
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

47.7 How to Configure RPR Bandwidths

1. If several subracks (including microshelves) are used, make sure that the Subrack 1 tab
is selected in the Module View.

2. In the Module View, right-click a PF2G5 card symbol -> Configuration -> GFP
Assignment...

3. In the GFP Assignment window, LP Bandwidth Configuration or LP GFP Assignment


area (as applicable), enter the Ingress Bandwidth and / or Egress Bandwidth for each
involved LP port.

4. Click Apply.

516 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

48 How to... (Data and Software Handling)

48.1 How to Download VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...

2. Set NE State to Idle.

3. In the Config DB Action field, select Set to Default Config DB.

4. Click Download...
A standard Open dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.

5. Select the path and the file you want to download.

6. Click Open. The VCDB Download window appears.

7. Click Start to start the download. The state of the download process is displayed. After
the download process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the
VCDB download is successfully completed.

8. If the download is not concluded successfully and an error message occurs, click Close
to close the window.
Check the reason for the error (e. g. open the Module View and check the window to
verify which setting is missing).
After removing the error, repeat the download process.

9. After successful download, the NE can be set to active. As a precondition for this, the
NE name must not be the default name. If necessary, change the NE name via the NE
symbol -> Configuration -> Network Element...

10. In the Config DB Management window, select NE Stare Active and click Apply. The NE
will be initialized automatically.

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 517
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

48.2 How to Upload VCDB Files

1. In the Module View, right-click the NE symbol -> Config DB Management...

2. In the Config DB Management window, click Upload...


A standard File Save As dialog for VCDB file selection is opened.

3. Select the path and enter the file you want to upload.

4. Click Save. The VCDB Upload window appears.

5. Click Start to start the upload. The state of the download process is displayed. After the
upload process has been concluded, the window closes automatically and the VCDB
upload is successfully completed..

Note:

During VCDB upload, all empty slots will be set to Empty-Auto provisioning state, even if
configured to Empty before.

518 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

49 How to... (Exchanging Defective Modules)

49.1 How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH


The MMC must be exchanged in case of an Flash SW alarm at the SCOH card, see SCOH,
CLU, NE and Subrack Fault Clearance

The replacement of a defect MMC by a new one (with no data), must be done with an
operating SCOH.
The current NE-VCDB is being copied automatically to the new MMC.
The password data, license and subrack label are not automatically transformed to the MMC.
To adopt these data to the new MMC, they must be inserted via the LCT again.

If an SCOH is replaced, the old MMC (placed at the front panel of the SCOH) must be
adopted before the new SCOH is inserted. The MMC data belongs always to the subrack!
Passwords, license and subrack label are set to default after an SCOH reboot.
Also the NE-VCDB is being lost after a Power Off (pulling out the SCOH).

Note:

The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

For detailed flow charts, see:

How to Change a Defective SCOH

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

A42022-L5957-C55-1-7619 519
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

49.2 How to Change a Defective SCOH


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.

Note:

The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

520 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 521
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB

Flow Chart Symbol Legend

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

522 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

49.3 How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective SCOH inclusive a defective MMC, you must follow the below flow
chart.

Note:

The SCOH contains a backup battery. See the ITMN manual how to activate and handle that
battery.

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 523
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

524 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Retrieve NSAP and VCDB

Flow Chart Symbol Legend

How to Change a Defective SCOH

How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 525
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

49.4 How to Change a Defective MMC on a Working SCOH


For general notes, see How to Replace an MMC and/or the SCOH.

If you replace a defective MMC on a working SCOH, you must follow the below flow chart.

526 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 527
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

Flow Chart Symbol Legend

How to Change a Defective SCOH

How to Change a Defective SCOH inclusive a Defective MMC

528 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619
Operation Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN)
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

49.5 Retrieve NSAP and VCDB

A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619 529
Graphical User Interface Manual (GUIMN) Operation
SURPASS hiT 7070 3.0

49.6 Flow Chart Symbol Legend

530 A42022-L5957-B155-1-7619

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen